GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT LADDER - II

Operators Manual

B- 66184EN/02 April 1998

 Warnings and notices for GFLE-003

this publication

Warning
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various
matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this
manual should be regarded as impossible.

Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have
been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or
variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with
installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in
all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to
holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with

respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of
the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall
apply.

The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

CIMPLICITY Genius

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Alarm Master PROMACRO

CIMSTAR Series Five
Field Control Series 90
Genet Series One
Helpmate Series Six
LogicMaster Series Three
Modelmaster VuMaster
PowerMotion Workmaster
ProLoop

Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd.

Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
 [Notice]
1. The FAPT LADDER-II software is copyrighted by FANUC
Ltd.
2. No part of the software or this manual may be used or
reproduced in any form without the prior consent of FANUC
Ltd.
3. The software shall be installed on no more than one computer
at a time. Separate software packages must be purchased for
each additional installation.
4. The information in this manual is subject to change without
notice.

[Trademarks]
1. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
2. PC/AT and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation.
3. PR2OlH is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
4. VP1000 is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to

describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not
be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so
many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as
possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.
 CONTENTS

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .
1.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . .. . . .
1.2.1 The Overview of PMC Function . . . . . . .
1.2.2 PMC Models to be Supported . . .
1.2.3 The Procedure to Make a Sequence Program . .
1.3 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 PMC Programming Method . .
1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data . . . .. .

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . . . .
2.1 CONFIG. SYS . .

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INST ALLATlON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

3.1 THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE ................. . . . . . . . 13
3.2 INSTALLATION ............................ . . . . . . . 13
3.3 DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION 14
3.4 FILE CONFIGURATION ....................... . . . . 14
3.4.1 File System ......................... 14
3.4.2 The Constitution of Source Program ........ . . . . . . 16

4. OPERATION .......................... . .. . . . . 17
4.1 ACTIVATION ... _ ................ 17
4.2 GENERAL OF OPERATIONS . _ _ ....... . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 20
4.2.1 Menu Configuration . _ _ ........ 20
4.3 COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS ...... 22
4.4 INITIAL MENU .................. , .. 25
4.4.1 Program Selection ............. 25
4.4.2 Off-Line Function ............. . . 26
4.4.3 On-Line Functron ............. 27
4.4.4 On-Line Function (Selected Program) .. . . 27
4.4.5 Utility ...................... 27
4.4.6 Termination ... ............ . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 27
4.5 OFF-LINE FUNCTION ................ . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.5.1 .............................. ,. . .. . . . . . . . 28
4.5.2 Editing .......................... 28
4.5.2.1 Title data editing ............... 30
4.5.2.2 Ladder diagram/step sequence edrting 32
4.5.2.3 Symbol & comment ediling ........ 87
4.5.2.4 Message edrlrng ............... 92
4.5.2.5 I10 module editing ......... .... 94
4.5.2.6 System parameter editing ..... _ .. 97
 4.53 Printout ................................................ 101
453.1 Overview ........................................... 101
4.5.3.2 Starting and ending printing .............................. 102
4.5.3.3 Output item setting .................................... 103
4.5.3.4 Print format-l: SETUP menu ............................ 111
4.5.3.5 Changing printer output format-2
(AMOFTRP, DAT/ .INF/message file) ....................... 112
4.5.3.6 Changing the printer specification .......................... 123
4.5.4 Compilation ............................................. 124
4.5.4.1 Start and terminate .................................... 125
4.5.4.2 Compile options ...................................... 128
4.5.4.3 Password set function .................................. 129
4.5.5 Decompilation ............................................ 131
4.5.5.1 Operation ........................................... 132
455.2 Decompile option ...................................... 133
4.5.5.3 Password ........................................... 136
4.5.5.4 Outputting to split files ................................... 137
4.5.6 Input/Output ............................................. 138
4.5.6.1 I/O port setting ....................................... 138
4.5.6.2 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) ........................ 140
4.5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC ............................... 142
4.5.6.4 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card . . 144
4.5.6.5 Handy file + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format) ................. 150
4.5.6.6 Backup of user program ................................. 153
4.5.7 Setting Program Options .................................... 155
4.5.7.1 Compiler ............................................ 155
4.5.7.2 Decompiler .......................................... 157
4.5.7.3 Modifying program option initial values (OPTION.CNF) ........... 158
4.5.8 Mnemonic Editing ......................................... 159
4.5.8.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file ............. 159
4.5.8.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program ............. 162
4.5.8.3 Mnemonic file format ................................... 163
4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) ...................... 166
4.5.8.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format) ......................... 172
4.5.8.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected
when setting a model ................................... 173
4.5.8.7 User batch file execution ................................ 174
4.5.9 Utyilty ................................................. 175
4.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function .................. 180
4.6 ONLINE ...................................................... 181
4.6.1 The Outline of Online Function ................................ 181
4.6.1.1 Outline ............................................. 181
4.6.1.2 Starting the on-line function .............................. 184
4.6.1.3 Menus ............................................. 191
4.6.2 Preparation .............................................. 192
4.6.2.1 Connecting the cable ................................... 192
 4.6.2.2 Parameter screen for on-line monitor .................. . 193
4.6.2.3 Modifying parameters ............................. . 194
4.6.2.4 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function ......... . . 194
4.6.2.5 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function
(Only for Power Mate-H) .......................... . . . . 195
4.6.3 Fife ............................................. . . . . 196
4.6.3.1 Fitesave ...................................... . . 196
4.6.3.2 Selecting off-line function from on-line functron ........... . . 198
4.6.3.3 Exit ......................................... . . . 198
4.6.4 Diagnose ......................................... . . 200
4.6.4.1 Ladder monitor ................................. . 201
4.6.4.2 PMC Status window .............................. . . 215
4.6.4.3 Signal Status window ............................. . . . 216
4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter ................................. . .. . 218
4.6.4.5 PMC alarm status ............................... . . . . 231
4.6.4.6 Executing or stopping a ladder program ................ . . . 232
4.6.4.7 Displaying system information ....................... . . . a 233
4.6.5 Input/Output ....................................... . . . 234
4.6.5.1 Loading from the PMC ............................ . . . . 234
4.6.5.2 Storing to the PMC .............................. . . 235
4.6.5.3 Writing to F-ROM ............................... . . 236
4.6.6 Communication ..................................... 238
4.6.7 Examples of Operation ............................... . . 240
4.6.7.1 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC ........... . . 240
4.6.7.2 Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer ... . . 252

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST ..................... . . . . 254

5.1 A: INITIAL MENU ....................... . . . . 255
5.1.1 Fatal Error ...................... . . . . . 255
5.1.2 Error .................... ..... . . . 255
5.2 B : TITLE EDITING . . . . . 256
5.2.1 Error .......................... . . . 256
5.3 C : 10 MODULE EDITING .................. 257
5.3.1 Error .. ....................... . . 257
5.3.2 Warning ........................ 257
5.4 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING .......... . . . 258
5.4-l Error ...... ................... 258
5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING ..... . . . . 259
5.5.1 Fatal Error ............... ...... 259
5.5.2 Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) ...... . . . . 259
5.5.3 Error (at Editing Step Sequence) ...... 260
5.5.4 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) .... 262
5.6 F : SYMBOL 8, COMMENT EDITING .......... . 263
5.6.1 Error .......................... . . 263
5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING ................... . . . . 263
5.7.1 Error .... .................... 263
I. BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS)
.

,,,,,, ,,, ,, ,,, ,,,

 1. GENERAL

1. GENERAL

1.1 Overview

Thank you for purchasing FANUC FAPT LADDER-II.

FAPT LADDER-II is a programming system for developing FANUC PMC sequence programs.
This software is designed to operate on IBM PC/AT and compatible computers running MS-DOS,
and supports both the Japanese and English languages. For details of the operating conditions,
see Chapter 2.

Personal computer Name Specification Remarks

IBM PC/AT and FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201 -J503 Japanese and English are
compatible machine both supported

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate this software about that
are specific to the system designed for use with personal computers.
For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to the manuals listed below.

T FANUC PMC-MODEL PAl/PAB/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RBG/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2

Programming manual (LADDER language) J B-61 863E

Inquiry form
If you have any questions after reading this operators manual and the manuals listed above,
use the inquiry form attached at Appendix 9 to consult us the questions.

-l-
 1. GENERAL

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

1) For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-R Series
. PMCRA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3
. PMCRB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL FIB3
PMCRB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4
PMCRB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5
PMC-RB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6
PMCRC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3
. PMCRC4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4

PMC-PA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL PA3

PMC-QC FANUC PMC-MODEL QC

PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB

PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

2) Others
MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless it is necessary to distinguish
between the two operating systems.

-2-
 1. GENERAL

1.2 The Major Functions

1.2.1 The overview of PMC function

L
. . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . . ...) CNC (.......... i
Machine Tool

RS-232-C PMC DVDO

RS-232-C
.,.,,.. . ...

(INLINE functions through RS-232-C (Note 1)

Monitorring & debugging a sequence program j
Run/Stop a sequence program
Transferring a sequence program
Write to Flash ROM
FLOPPY I
Setting and display PMC parameters
CASSETTE
/Handy File
II::::.

EPROM/ ROM
MODULE
RS-232-C 1

Input/Edit
Personal computer sequence
Floppy disk program
IBM PC/AT

Hard disk

Fig. 1.2.1 General of PMC Function

Note 1) The specification of the above functions may vary from one PMC model to another.
Also, the above functions may not be usable with some models. For details of each
function, refer to the PMC programming manual for the model being used.

-3-

,, ,,
 1. GENERAL

< Functions of FAPT LADDER-II >

Input, Output, Display and Edit sequence program
Monitoring and Debugging of sequence program
(Display of signal status, PMC alarm, PMC status.)
(Online monitoring of ladder diagram. Display of cross reference.)
Setting and display PMC parameters
. Run/Stop the sequence program
Transferring of sequence program
. Writting to Flash ROM
. Print of the sequence program

c PMC built-in functions >

. Input, Output, Display and Edtt sequence program
Monitoring and Debugging of sequence program
(Display of signal status, signal waveforms, ladder diagram, PMC alarm, memory)
(and crossreference.)
(Monitorring of ladder diagram, step sequence. Debugging user C language.) .
Setting and display PMC parameters
. Run/Stop the sequence program

1.2.2 PMC models to be supported

PMC models to be supported by FAPT LADDER-II are as below.

PMC-RA3
PMCRB3 (Note 1)
PMCRB4 (Note 1)
PMC-RB5 (Note 1)
PMC-RB6 (Note 1)

PMCRC3 (Note 1)
PMCRC4 (Note 1)
PMC-PA3 (Note 1)
PMC-QC
PMC-NB
PMCNB2

(Note 1) ONLINE function is supported with this PMC

-4-
 1. GENERAL

1.2.3 The procedure to make a sequence program

Start of control system development

+
Decrde the control object (machines, CNC)

Decide the specifications of control operations

Calculate the number of DVOO points
Estrmate the control scale

Create the ladder diagram (desrgnicreate addoress mapcoading)

J
Input, edit, debua and print the sequence procvam

t t
FAPT LADDER-II 7 CNC (PMC)

Ladder diagram editing . Ladder diagram editing

Mnemonic editing

Compile/Link
I I
f- Decompile (1
I
t I IN0
ONLINE function (for debug) I YES

Pnnt the sequence program fi-----c

FAPT LADDER-II supports an off-line function and on-line functions. The off-line function is
used for performing programming using a personal computer that is not connected to the CNC
(PMC).
The off-lrne function IS equrvalent to the FAPT LADDER function. The on-line functions are used
for programming when a connection and communication are established with the CNC (PMC).
There are basically two on-line functions: the on-line function and the on-line (selected program)
function. The former is designed for use wrth CNC (PMC) internal programs. The latter is used
mainly to monitor and edit programs designed to operate on the personal computer.
Addrtionally. a PMC programming system, FAPT LADDER (for personal computers), is available.
Thus version of FAPT LADDER IS not covered by this manual. For informatton about FAPT
LADDER for personal computers, refer to the FAPT LADDER (for personal computers)
operators manual (B-661 31).

-5-
 1. GENERAL

1.3 About PMC Program

1.3.1 PMC programming method

The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequence control governed by a PMC.
This method was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since it has been in use for years,
many sequence engineers are already fatiiiiar with it.
The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC, the larger and the more
complicated the sequence program becomes. And it is hard to describe such program for ladder
method.
To overcome this problem, step sequence method programming has been introduced into FAPT
LADDER-II.

(1) What is the step sequence method ?

The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequence control governed by a
programmable controller, this method features the direct representation of the control flow on
a flow chart. Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder
method. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the processes and is
well-suited to the control of entire process.

Step sequence method is available to PMC-RB4&lBG/RC4.

The programming by step sequence method is supported by FAPT LADDER-II, not but by the built-
in editing function on PMC-RB4/RBG/RC4.
Setting a model in FAPT LADDER desides witch method, step sequence or ladder, is used.

For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.
(4.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]

-6-
 1. GENERAL

The configuration of a sequence program

A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit ;
. The 1st level of ladder
The 2nd level of ladder
The 3rd level of ladder
Subprograms of ladder
Subprograms of step sequence

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

ISub Program Pl (Step Sequence) I

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

.
.

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

-7-
 1. GENERAL

(3) Data flow

- FAPT LADDER-II I

Source program

Ladder 1st level

Mnemonic Mnemonic program

A mnemonic program without

step sequence

t
Compilation/Decompilation
1
Object code

IMemory
I
card format file I
------I!
t
Input/Output Input/Output

I I I

RS-232-C Handy File Memory card

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

CNC

V v V
1) [PMCI 1) FMCI 1) WC1
2) II/O1 2) II01 2) If/O1
3) [HOST] 3) [FDCAS] 3) [MCARD]

(Boot process also can

read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when Input/output

-8-
 1. GENERAL

1.3.2 About symbol & comment data

On FAPT LADDER-II, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, and can
add notes to a sequence program.
They are generally calledsymbol & comment data.

(1) The definition of terms

The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between some symbol & comment data.

Terms Definition and uses I Display

Symbol Name assigned uniquely to each relay/coil, x0.0 INPUT

to be used in place of PMC address.
+I---,++
Relay comment Text assigned to relays/coils to explain them.

1 COMMENT COMMENT
Coil comment Text assigned to coils to explain them.
HERE IS COIL
COMMENT

Net comment Text assigned between ladder nets to explain

them.
{ COMMENT )

(2) Symbol & comment specification list

(a) For input signal and internal relay

I Speciftcation Symbol I Relay comment Coil comment

Available ASCII characters 1ASCII characters ASCII characters

characters (lower-case alphabetic Japanese kanalkanji Japanese kanalkanji
characters not allowed) characters characters
(Note 1)

16 byte 16 byte 30 byte

20,000 entries 20,000 20,000

(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)

Not allowed Allowerd Allowerd

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or No Yes, if the symbol

shorter assigned to the same
(Note 3) address is 6 bytes or
shoter (Note 3)

Note 1) CRT/MD1 can not display Japanese characters, replaced to blank.

Note 2) Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may restrict
them.
Note 3) When the total size of all coil comments exceeds 64 kbytes, no symbols and
comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.

-9-
 1. GENERAL

(b) For ladder sequence program

Specification Net comment

Available characters ASCII characters

Japanese kana/kanji characters
Line feed

Steps to occupy 2 step/Net comment

Maximum characters/line 64 characters/line

4095 characters/Net comment (Note 1)

Maximum lines 100 lines/Net commennt (Note 1)

Maximum number About 20,000 Net comments (Note 2)

Display on CRT/MD1 No

Note 1) The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the Net comment.
Note 2) Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum number of Net
comments. Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer
may further restrict them.

-lO-
 2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

To use this software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied.

Computer IBM PC/AT and compatible machines (Note 1)

ICPU 386 or hrgher

OS MS-DOS Version 5.OAlior later (to activate Japanese system)

I--
Memory

IHard disk
MS-DOS

Conventronal
EMS and/or

About 3 Mbytes
Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

memory 520 Kbytes or more

XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)

or more space
(Note 2)
(Note 3)

(Note 4)

1Graphic adapter VGA or higher

EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note 5)

be in conformity with MS-KANJI API

(Note 1) This software does not run on PC98 series of NEC.

(Note 2) Even if the machrne has 640 Kbytes memory, the empty memory may not be more
than 520 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space.
The size of free space in memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command
CHKDSK.
(Note 3) The quantity of the EMS and XMS memory effects on the performance to handle
Symbol data and Net comment. Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory
specially for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.
Moreover, at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes, the maximum number of
steps which FAPT LADDER can handle may be ristricted. Please prepare 256 Kbytes
or more EMS rf possible.
(Note 4) In addrtion, an area for storing sequence data is required.
(Note 5) [NEC PR201HlandlFANUC PRINTERtare also available by changing system file.
For details, refer 1014.5.3.6 Changing the Printer Specification).

About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used :

EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as an temporary area.
Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory
according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.

(1) Expansion memory

When reading ladder programs, FAPT LADDER uses EMS if available. If EMS is not
available, FAPT LADDER uses conventional memory. When only conventional memory is
used, up to 21840 program steps can be created. When 256KB EMS memory IS available,
however, up to 32000 program steps can be created. The srze of EMS is 256KB for all PMC
models, regardless of the size of the program to be edited.

-ll-
 2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

(2) EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data
FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory lor Symbol & Comment data if available.
When neither of them are available, FAPT LADDER will make temporary file on the hard
diskdrive, and processing large number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.
About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data.

(3) EMS and XMS memory for Net comment

FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or temporary file as same as Symbol &
Comment data.
About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Net cement.

2.1 CONFIG. SYS

Before FAPT LADDER-II can be started, the following lines must be added to the CONFlG.SYS
file:

DEVICE = C:UDOSVANSI.SYS
DEVICE = C:VDOSVEMM~~~.EXE
DEVICE = C:UDOSVMSIME.SYS
DEVICE = C:VDOSVMSIMEK.SYS

(1) ANSI.SYS (required)

The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot be omitted.

(2) EMM386.EXE
This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. When using
another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in
CONFIG.SYS.

(3) MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS
This device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language input. When
using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of the
setting required in CONFIG.SYS.

(Note 1) All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with MS-DOS. This manual
assumes that these device drivers are placed under the vDOS directory on drive C.
The specification of switches and parameters may be required for the above settings.
For details, refer to the MS-DOS on-line help or the relevant manual.

(Note 2) When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with the memory card for
details of the setting required in CONFIGSYS.

(Note 3) Some device drivers may adversely affect the operation of FAPT LADDER-II. If a
problem is anticipated, specify only ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.SYS. Omit the specification
of the other device drivers. When only ANSI.SYS is specified, FAPT LADDER-II will
support only English, but allows any contention with other device drivers to be identified
quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix 7.

-12-
 3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

3.1 The Contents of Pacage

FAPT LADDER-II is stored in 5 floppy disks listed below.

The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contens.
(1) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 1)A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-1
(2) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 2)!A08B-9201 -J503#2207-2
(3) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 3)!A08B-9201 -J503#2207-3
(4) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 4)!A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-4
(5) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 5)!A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-5

3.2 Installation

Install the system using install .exe stored in Vol. 1 of system disk.
the example below assumes that a system floppy disk is set in drive A:, and directory Y FLADDER
has been created on the hard disk drive C: to install the system.

[Operation]
Set system floppy disk Vol. 1 in the drive A:.
Execute install. exe using the following command.
C: + > A: Y INSTALL
After that, go on accordint to inquiry of the system which is inquired when necessry.
To select the displaying color. the dialog-box below appears.
Select the color pattern by < 7 >, < 5_7 key and the color of dialog-box itself will be
changed. Select the displaying color for matching your personal computer s display.

Select color type.

. COLOR

0 MONO 1

Fig 3.2 (a) Select Displaying Color Dialog Box

-13-
 3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

@ If installation completes, the message below appears.

(Note 1) To stop installation, press the <Esc> key.

(Note 2) Note that the files in the directory specified to be installed are all deleted

3.3 Directory Configuration After Installation

The installer automatically creates the following subdirectories under the specified directory
(C: Y FLADDER in the above example):

C: Y FLADDER

l=zz

The messages to be displayed by FAPT LADDER-II (such as menus, displayed instructions, and
error indications) are contained in a file under this subdirectory.
The installer automatically creates the following subdirectory (indicated by ) when an on-line
function is used:

C: Y FLADDER JPN
ENG
PMC-RAM ()

(Note) Be careful not to accidentally delete the above directory.

3.4 File Configuration

3.4.1 File system

The files constituting FAPT LADDER-II are described below

(1) Customizable files

Some functions can be customized by the user. These functions include setting of the format
for printing created ladder programs, and communication port setting based on the RS232C
standard.
For these functions, the associated data is held in text-format files, which can be directly
edited by the user. These files are listed below.

(a) Printing (For details, see Section 4.5.3.5.)

. AMROFTRP.DAT
CROSSINF.DAT

-14-
 3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

. .INF

(b)Communications (For details. see Section 4.5.6.1.)

. FL10 - AT.DAT

(c)Compile/decompile (For details. see Section 4.573.)

OPTION.CNF

(d)Entire system
FLMNE.DAT (For details, see Section 4.5.8.7.)
FLVIEW.DAT (For details, see Section 4.5.9.)

(2) Other files

(a)README.TXTIREADMEJ.TXT
These text files contain important information that became available after the manual was
printed.
Use this information in combination with the manual. Note that READMEJ.TXT contains
Japanese text, while README.TXT contains English text.

(b)*.JPN.ENG
A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the messages (menus.
displayed instructions. and error indications) to be displayed or printed by the system. The
location of such a file is described in Section 3.3.

(c)FLMNE.ERR
The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are written into this text file.

(d).EXE
A file having this extension IS an executable file. Such files are not handled by the user.

(3) Files that are not installed

The files under subdirectory vAPPENDlX on Volume 5 are not installed by the installer.
These files are listed below.

(a)Printing (For details. see Section 4.5.3.6.)

. AMROFTRP.ESC
. AMROFTRP.PR

(b)Standard symbols (For details. see Appendix 4.)

F16&18-M. SYM
F16&18-T. SYM
PM-D.SYM
PM-H.SYM
FSOM-CNV. SYM
FSOT-CNV. SYM
. PM-C_CNV. SYM

-15-
 3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

(c)Message conversion tools (For details. see Appendix 5.)

- CHGMES.EXE

3.4.2 The constitution of source program

In FAPT LADDER-II, a sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is called source
program and managed by storing in files below.
H incase of named "C:Y DATAYSAMPLE" as source program

- SAMPLE.ERR execution result file (Note 1)

l SAMPLE.MAP map file (Note 1)

l CONTROL Source program managing file

l SYSPARAM
* XSYMBOL.xxx
* MESSAGE
* IOMODULE
* LEVELl. #LA
- LEVEL2. #LA
* LEVEL3. #LA
- Pyyy. #LA
* Pzzz. #SS
* NETCMT.xxx
- * MCARD
System parameter data file
Title data file
Symbol & Comment data file (Note 2)
Message data file
I/O module data file
1st level ladder data file
2nd level ladder data file
3rd level ladder data file (Note 3)
Sub-program ladder data file (Note 4)
Sub-program step sequence data file (Note 4)
Net comment data file (Note 2)
Memory card format data file

(Note 1) Contain source program compile/decompile results and map information. These files
are not Included in a source program, but are named in accordance with the name of
the source program.
These files are stored under the directory one level above the source program
storage directory.
(Note 2) xxx is number of multi file managing.
(Note 3) Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder at PMWRC3IRC4IRC4 (STEP)/NB/NB2/QC.
(Note 4) "YYY","zzz" is number of sub-program.

- 16-
 4. OPERATION

4. OPERATION

4.1 Activation

(1) Activation method

01 Move to the drive and directory where the FAPT LADDER-II system software is installed.
0 Key in FLADDER -z Enter >
(Example) Start FAPT LADDER-II when the software is installed under the \FLADDER
directorv on drive C:

1~:=~f%?f!)~ER < Enter > 1

C:\FLADDER > FLADDER c Enter >

6 The FAPT LADDER-II initial screen, shown below, appears (Fig. 4.1 (a)). After this screen
is displayed for 3 seconds, the screen display automatically changes to the initial menu
screen (Fig. 4.1(b)). Pressing any key while the initial screen is displayed immediately
switches the display to the initial menu screen, without the 3second delay.

(Note) When no source program is selected, menu items OFF-LINE FUNCTION and OFF-
LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)* are displayed using dotted lines. These menu items
cannot be selected.

F A P T LADDER-II 1
I I A08B-9201 -J503 Version 01 .O
Copyright (C) 1991- 1995 FANUC LTD.
i I
il II II
17 II I II
FANUC

1
Fig. 4.1 (a) FAPT LADDER-II Top Screen

fnitial menu .. ..
Drw. No.
Ver. -
Press [TAB] key to move the cursor and
press [ENTER] or [SPACE] key to select.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~
..._.....
_,.._..
.I.>
:::::::::.::.:::.:: ... .:.:+:....A. *r..,...dY.:.<:>

Off-tine Eunctjon
OWtine Func tidii
On-tine f selected grogrtim)
Utility
Exit

Fig. 4.1(b) Initial Menu Screen

-17-
 4. OPERATION

(2)
There are two methods of returning from the FAPT LADDER-II initial menu screen to the DOS
command line.

Press the < Esc > key while the initial menu screen is displayed.
Alternatively,select menu item END from the initial menu.
For details of selecting a menu item from the initial menu, see Section 4.4.

(Note)
FAPT LADDER-II can be started more easily by creating a batch file, as described below, under a
directory for which a path IS set.
Example: The following batch file, named FLDDER, is created when the FAPT LADDER-II
system software is installed under the \FLADDER directory on drive C:

- 19-
 4. OPERATION

4.2 GENERAL OF OPERATIONS

4.2.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

$ - Program Selection

TOP screen
Off-Line Function - (1) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (b))
-I+ -

- On-Line Function - (2) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

- On-Line - (3) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

(selection program)

- Utrlity DOS
- flOadat
- View result
I I
L- Linker

(1) TITLE
- LADDER DIAGRAM/
PARAMETER STEP SEQUENCE
- SYMBOL - SYMBOL & COMMENT
LADDER DIAGRAM - MESSAGE
STEP SEQUENCE - I/O MODULE
- SYSTEM PARAMETER

- FA WRITER
- CROSS REFERENCE LIST _ PMC WRITER
- BIT ADDRESS MAP - PMC
Handy File
- Memory Card
- PROGRAM OPTION SET-UP - BACKUP

SOURCE PROGRAM+MNEMONIC FILE

MNEMONIC FILE+SOURCE PROGRAM
EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE

- 20 -
 4. OPERATION

File save
Off-Line Function
Exit

(3) On-Line Function Diagnose Ladder Monitor/ Timer

(selected program) Online Editor Counter

1 t
- PMC Status Keep relay
- Signal Status Data table control
- PMC Parameter Data table
- PMC alarm status
- RUN/STOP the ladder
- System Information

-21-
 4. OPERATION

4.3 Common System Operations

The operations described below are common operations for FAPT LADDER-II.

(1) Function keys

When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video, the user can select the
desired menu item by pressing the corresponding function key.

I1

IF11 WI IF31 IF41 WI WI if=71 IF81 WI IF101

(2) Escape key

The escape key < ESC> has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The
escape key terminates the current screen then returns the display to the previous screen in the
menu hierarchy.

(3) Cursor keys

The cursor keys < t >, < 1 >, < t >, and < * z are used to move the cursor to
select input items.
When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second or subsequent cursor
can be moved by pressing the <SHIFT> key together with the < +- > or < + > key.

(4) Scroll keys

The scroll keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display the
previous one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively (for
the PC9801).
The scroll keys <PAGE DOWN > and < PAGE UP > display the next page and the previous
page, respectively (for the IBM PC/AT).

(5) [INS] key

This key switches between the overwrite mode < 0 > and insert mode < I >.

(6) [TAB] key

When multipul keys are displayed, press < Tab > key and select one button.

-22-
 4. OPERATION

(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

Main menu PMC-RB3 <o>[c: \FLADDER 1

t- Item name t Model currently selected t- Current

currently selected directory name
Edit mode (overwrite/insert)

(Note) The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the descnptions of this
manual, depending on the personal computer used.

(El) Pop-up menu

When the following pop-up menu appears, the desired process can be selected usrng any of
the three methods described below.

1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key < 7 > or < 1 >, such that the item to be selected
is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN > key selects that item.

2) Function key
A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an item, press the
corresponding function key.

3) Command name
An uppercase letter In (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command name. In the
above case, pressing the letter key < U >, <Cl >, or <A> can select the Update, Quit, or
Append command, respectively.

-23 -
 4. OPERATION

(9) Pull-down menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top of the screen:

....; FiM; ::: ,.:.,

2. Diagnose 3. l/O 4. Communication %I&
I I I I I

J
1 I I I
Function number.
)

Function name
Icon for PMC status
indication
(See the section
explaining how to start
the on-line functions.)

Pressing the < Alt > key displays the pull-down menu for ?i Ff@.~v
The pull-down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing the < Alt > key and
the corresponding function number simultaneously.

1:We 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication %lll-

file sa\rei
I

I Exit

Using the cursor keys. position the highlight to the desired item on a functions pull-down
menu. A menu item with an arrow mark (G) at its right edge has its own pull-down
menu, which can be displayed by pressing the < + > key.

The target screen is displayed by pressing the < Enter > key after positioning the
highlight to a desired menu item.

-24-
 4. OPERATION

4.4 Initial Menu

The inttial menu screen appears when the FAPT LADDER-II system is started. See also Section
4.1.
This screen reappears upon the termmation of a function chosen from this menu. To select a
function from this menu, use the <Tab> key to move the cursor down to the desired function,
then press the <Enter> key or spacebar. The cursor can be moved up by pressing
< Shaft > + < Tab > simultaneously.

4.4.1 Program selection

When PROGRAM SELECT is selected from the initial menu, the screen display switches to the
screen used to specify the name of a source program to be used with the FAPT LADDER-II
system.
fi) To spectfy the source program name, enter drive:vsource-program-name.

@ After entering the name of the desired source program, press Fl (EXEC] or <Enter>. Press
FlO [END] to return to the initial menu screen without changing the source program name.

Examples:
Specifying SAMPLE as a source program under the DATA directory on drive C:
Enter CvDATAvSAMPLE [EXEC].
When the source program name is specified, the PMC model name and source program name are
displayed in the upper half of the initial menu screen.

Specifying a new source program name:

The model setting screen, shown below, appears. Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the
name of the PMC model for a new source program, then press the <Enter > key (Fig. 4.4.1). If
Fl [COPY] is pressed without specifying a PMC model, an existing source program name can be
copied as a new source program.

The FAPT LADDER-II system creates a directory for the specified source program name, and
creates each of the source program files.

-25-
 4. OPERATION

PMC E;IB
IMC -NBZ

SPliTI PMC type for new program.

Fig. 4.4.1 Selection of PMC type

4.4.2 Off-line function

When OFF-LINE FUNCTION is selected from the initial menu, the off-line menu screen appears
(Fig. 4.4.2). The off-line function includes a function equivalent to the FAPT LADDER system
software, displayed on the off-line menu screen. This function is used mainly for programming
using a personal computer when connection with the CNC (PMC) has not been established. For
details. see Section 4.5.

Fl KEY EDIT

F2 KEV PRINT

F3 KtV COMPILE

f1 KEV DECOHPIL~

f5 KEY I/O

Ph KEY PROGRRH OPIIDN SLIPUP

f? KEY MNEMONIC EDIT

tB KtV UllLllV

tY KtV ON-LINt tUNCllDN

Fig. 4.4.2 Offline menu screen

 4. OPERATION

4.4.3 On-line function

When ON-LINE FUNCTION is selected from the initial menu, the on-line function is applied to the
programs held by the PMC. Programs are loaded into the personal computer by means of
automatic communication with the PMC. For details, see Section 4.6.

4.4.4 On-line function (selected program)

When ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM) is selected from the initial menu, the on-line function is
used for the program selected on the personal computer. A comparison is made between the
program held by the PMC and that selected on the personal computer. If a mismatch is detected,
select a monitoring method. For details, see Section 4.6.

4.4.5 Utility

When UTILITY is selected from the initial menu, a function selection menu appears to enable the
user to select a function such as DOS, floadat. View result, and Linker. To start a desired function,
press the corresponding function key. For details of each function, see Section 4.5.

4.4.6 Termination

When END is selected from the initial menu, the screen display returns to the DOS command
line.

-27-
 4. OPERATION

4.5 Off-line function

4.5.1

F2 KEY PRINT

F3 KEY COHPILt

F1 KEY OFCOHPILF

F5 KEY I/O

Ff, KEY PROGRRH OPTION SET-UP

FI KEY MNEMONIC EDIT

t8 KtV UllLllV

tY KtV ON-LLNt CUNCIION

Fig. 4.5.1 Off-line Menu Screen

4.5.2 Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation]

il! Select (EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

m 1
c \ORIR\SRHPLI 1
Fl KEY EDIT

C2 KtV PRINI

C3 KtV CUnPLLt

II KFV Df CnHPll~t

15 KLV l/O

Fh KFV PROGRRH OPlION SCI-UP

tI KtV MNEMONIC EDIT

t8 KtV UllLllV

tY KtV UN-LlNt tUNCIIllN

Fig. 4.5.2 (a) Off-line Menu

-28-
 4. OPERATION

8 The followlng editing menu screen appears:

Fig. 4.5.2 (b) Editing Menu

0 Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

69 The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, the screen below is
displayed when [TITLE] is selected.

EDIT ( TlTUi ) m*<. : y:,:. G&-@fj@~~~~$$;*$@&$$

1) bWlllNI: TUJI. BLIUJIIH NkW

2) FMClllMi TWL NtW
:O tK & NC id: i l%NlJCF%CKIlELRC&I:16M4
4) IW IKu;W No
5) EIIITIUN No
6) IKo(;I(I\M Inbfwliw; No
7) DATA It IRUXW4IftG
8) IRffilbd DI:SICMiD UY
9) WIM kRl1TEN BY
IO) Rim

I 2 :I 4 5 6 7 _I I p%,r: : 9, f l,).q&

Fig. 4.5.2 (c) Editing Title

-29-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Termination

[Operation]
cis Select [END] or press the e ESC > key on the editing screen.

02 The following message appears:

E-1 Save (update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Edit

CC Press the desired function key.

(0 When UPDATE is selected. the editing operation is terminated after the results of
editing are written to a file.
(ii) When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results
of editing to a file.
(iii) When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.

0 When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the editing menu screen.
(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.
(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the main menu.

452.1 Title data editing

Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

(1) Start

[Operation]
ci? Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

- 30 -
 4. OPERATION

G9 The following title edrting screen appears:

I) KKIIINI:TWI. Blllll)tiR NAk

2) WIIIM; 11XJI.
NM
3) fm: & NCNM : FINK IM:HltlEl.K & I:IfM
I) PMC PRICRAM
NO

8) IRWAMW:SIGNRI)
BY
!I) RtMMIIIKN HY

Fig. 4.5.2.1

(2) Input

[Operation]
(I) Select an input ttem (displayed in reverse video) with the -Z 1 > and < 7 > keys.

Q) Enter data.

The maximum number of characters usable for each title data item IS listed below
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters
MACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 characters
CNC & NC NAME : 32 characters
PMC PROGRAM NO : 4 characters
EDITION NO : 2 characters
PROGRAM DRAWING NO : 32 characters
DATE OF PROGRAMMING : 16 characters
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : 32 characters
ROM WRITTEN BY : 32 characters
REMARKS : 32 characters

-31-
 4. OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation )
01 Select [END] on press the -z ESC > key to return lo the editing menu screen.

B, The following message appears.

11

0 Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing menu.

4.5.2.2 Ladder diagram/step sequence editing

(1) A program configuration screen

This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing of a target subprogram

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:VFLYDATAYSFC~~J

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 n LEVEL2 [I LEVEL3

D Pt)ooi 13 PO002 [:I PO004 u PO005 0 PO006 u PO007
u PO008 11 PO009 t3 PO014 0 PO015 q PO016 0 PO017
0 PO021 11 PO022 fd PO024 113PO025 u PO026 01POO27
. .
.
(7 PO101 cl PO202 m]PO304 [1]PO405 oJPO406 0]PO407

Sub-program : PO001

ADRESS DELETE NEW ZOOM

I

-32 -
 4. OPERATION

(a) Screen display (Pxxx represents a subprogram number)

Screen display Meaning Display by [ZOOM] or < Enter >

0 LEVEL1 the 1stladder level ladder diagram

j--J LEVEL2 the 2nd ladder level ladder diagram

0 LEVEL3 the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram

0 Pxxx a subprogram ladder diagram

01 Pxxx a subprogram step sequence diagram

A ] Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in editing step sequence diagram

x Pxxx a duplicate subprogram ladder or step seqence diagram

Note 1) The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.

Note 2) If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the
subprogram configuration screen is displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key,
the editing of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed is suspended.
Such subprograms are marked with n J.

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key Other keys

[ ADRESS] : Switching addresssymbol display
[ DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram < Page Up > : Displaying previous screen
[ NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram <Page down > : Displaying next screen
[ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

Meaning of display

IEDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:~FLADDERJ I

Edit : FAPT LADDER editing screen
(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model
[ AxFLADDERv : Current directory

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

PROGRAM : Remarks which is one of the title data

I ~LEVELI I lLEVEL2 i-tLEVEL3

LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder
LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder

I1 1 PO001 i1)POOO2 11 PO004 F-1PO005 f-1 PO006 11 PO007 I

I I : a subprogram of the ladder
I- I] : a subprogram of the step sequence

-33 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) Creating a new subprogram

- Press the [NEW] key.

New program name ?D 1

- Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for example).

(c) Modifying a subprogram

- Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for example), then press the
[ZOOM] or <Enter> key. Alternatively, position the cursor to P200 then press the
[ZOOM] or <Enter> key.

- If a subprogram number marked with LI] (P21, for example) is selected, the following
message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Yl

To continue the editing session using the results obtained from suspended previous editing
session, press the < Enter > key. To cancel the results of the previous editing session and
edit the subprogram from its original state, enter <N >.

-34-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Editing a ladder diagram

(4 Start
Display the program list screen. Position the cursor lo the program indicated by 0, then
press the [ZOOM] or <Enter> key. The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below,
appears.

ItlD-XQ 8 CCO=lESI DATR NO 1 800Bl/kWOl

SY=S!JNPLE 00001 RCO=RELRY SANPLE 00001?
I
~mI~~3llmrm~m~n~ I

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Edrling Screen

(1) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. (For the [View] command,
see (j) Combining a sequence program

W The line shows the name of the file which is being edited, number of the net which is
displayed on the screen, and the number of program steps/maximum number of steps that
can be edited.
(iii) The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label number (L address).

(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at the address selected by the
cursor.
6, AD = X000.0 : Address on which the cursor IS placed
Q, SY = SAMPLE : Symbol data
0000 1 Total number of symbols
@ RCO = RELAY SAMPLE : Relay comment data
00012 Total character numbers of relay comment
($I CC0 =TEST DATA No. 1 : Coil comment data
003000030 Total character numbers of symbol/coil comment
displayed on CRTIMDI.

-35-
 4. OPERATION

C-9Function key indications and selection

The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

0)

(cornand] 8
J
63 [comand]

(3) Under condition 0, holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

(a Under condition 8. holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

:3 ,:? 4 5 ,&$& 6 ..! , j. .:i; : :y * g .I,., 11) $&i- :

1 2

@ [Delnet]

I
1 WNC 2 CihCet 3 search 4 <*down 5 <*&I#$ 6 7 MICI+ZI 8 9 '10 "
I

I
t inrnet 2 InstIn 3 his&n 4 5 6 7 . .8 .' 9 1 10. :. I

!i? [Search]

I
1 9 2 bottom 3 rrch 4 W-W& 5 t+trth 6 g-srth 7 C-dOWi 8 i-Up 9 10 . I

03 [Copy] I [Move]

1 until 2 cancut 3 search 4 odown 5 '&up 6 7 8 9 10

t *

1 to 2 cancel 3 Search 4 c+down 5 c*up 6 to-fil 7 ftS+orfi 8 9 10 I

* (to-erg] is displayed in the [File] command mode only.

(9 [File]
Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired
processing from a POP-UP menu.

do, [syEdit]

1 bX8C 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-36-
 4. OPERATION

(Note) Whrle the functron keys of ti) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command
of 0 can be executed. For example, entering <A> and (COMAND] on the 0)
screen has the same effect as selecting F4 [Adress] on the @I screen. To select a
command of 0 in this way, enter the upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter)
in the correspondrng command name shown on the 8 screen.

6) Ladder program input

For ladder program input. select [LADDER] from the editing menu. The function key
programmer menu IS displayed. When no sequence program has been entered, the screen
displays only the rrght and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location In the ladder diagram.
Examples of basic rnstruction program input and function instructron program input are shown
below.

(i) Example of basic instruction program input

x0.1 D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7

X2.4

[Operation]
Move the cursor to the start position. then press [ -i i- 1.
The [ -I t_ ] symbol appears on the screen. The message HORIZONTAL LINE
ILLEGAL appears at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message warns the
user that horizontal ladder diagram line creatron is not completed. Enter an address
and bit data.

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the <Enter > key. The address is set at the
contact, and the cursor moves right.

As in 01 and 8. enter contact A of D30.2.

Enter contact B of F14.2.

Press [e ] and enter address F14.2, then press the <Enter> key. The
address is set on contact B and the cursor moves right.

Without moving the cursor, press [ 4 1.

A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn automatically and a relay coil
symbol appears near the right vertical rail.

-37-
 4. OPERATION

Enter address Y52.7, then press the < Enter > key.
The cursor automatically moves to the input start position on the next line.

Next, enter an OR conditron.

Press [ -#+- J and enter address X2.4, then press the -Z Enter > key.
The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right.

Press [ - ] to enter a horizontal line.

To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the horizontal line key

I - 1. The line segment will be entered as many times as the number entered.
Note, however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical rail.

A vertical line extending upward is required for OR. Press [ --! ) to enter a
vertical line extending upward.

(ii) Example of function instruction program input

For function instruction input. press the function key (functn]. Next, enter a SUB number,
then press the c Enter Z- key.
A function instruction can also be entered by entenng the function instruction name or SUB
number and pressing the [functn] key.
If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or SUB number, a function
instruction table that lists function instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be
displayed on the screen.
The table can be displayed just by pressing the (funcln] key without entering any data.
Then the function instruction table is automatically displayed.
Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen from the function instruction
table.

MOVE (1) (2) (3) (4)

(.)!.)(.)i) (.j(!!~K, 0000 0000
(SUB 8)

Output address
Control condition
-Input data address
- Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
-High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

When entering a function instruction with this function. enter the

parameters of the function instruction vertically as shown below.
I

-38-
 4. OPERATION

[Operation 1
0 Enter a control condition.
Press [ ---I l--- 1. Next. enter an address and bit data, then press the < Enter> key.
The cursor moves right..

Q Enter a function instruction.

Press the (functnj key. Next, enter SUB number 8. then press the <Enter> key. The
function Instructton diagram shown above appears.

Co Enter the parameters of the function instruction.

First. enter the high-order 4-bit logical multiplication data of the first parameter. then
press the <Enter> key. The cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter the
remaining three parameters one by one.

(iii) Restrictions and notes on ladder editing

[Restrictions]
Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portlon between the RD
and WRT instructions)
a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the
corresponding mnemonic program), the following message appears:
A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.
If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per screen

If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error
described below occurs.
a) Symptom
(a-1 1 When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following message appears.
The NET being created is too large.
If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is
displayed.
A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.

(a-2) When there are more than 70 fines totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears.
The NET being created IS too large.
If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears for a net that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,
and the display of the current net IS dtscontinued.
The NET IS larger than the edltlng buffer.
In this case, specify the net to be displayed, using the ladder diagram search
function (such as net number search).

How to obtain the number of lines per screen

Even if part of a net IS dlsplayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

- 39 -
 4. OPERATION

total for that screen. In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line.
The number of lines tn each net to be displayed is determined as follows:
(b-l ) Basic instructions
One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

+_I- 1 line

1-r *lines

(b-2) Function instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is: The number of control conditions
or parameters. whichever is greater, plus 1
Examples of calculation follow.

- When the number of control conditions < number of parameters

O_ Number of control conditions = 2

1004
Number of parameters = 4
Fro00
Number of lines = number of
ROlO
parameters + 1 = 5 lines
R020

- When the number of control conditions > number of parameters

Number of control conditions = 3

00
Number of parameters = 1
Number of lines = number of control
conditions + 1 = 4 lines

-4o-
 4. OPERATION

(b-3) Data table section of function instructions

The data table section of the COD, CODB, or DISP instruction is calculated as
follows:

- When the data table is one or two bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables/6 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

ACT
--i+ SUB 49 0011
DISP
0003

0300

000 0000 0000 0000 Number of lines in the data table

003 0000 0000 0000 section = 1 l/6
006 0000 0000 0000 = 1 with remainder 5
009 0000 0000 = 2 lines

- When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables14 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

0005

0007

D300

0320

Number of lines in the data table

000 00000000 00000000
section = 514
002 00000000 00000000
= 1 with remainder 1
004 00000000 -
= 2 lines

-4l-
 4. OPERATION

(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per screen

For the ladder shown below, the number of lines in the screen display section is
obtained as follows:

- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and 6.

- Number of lines in net A
Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines 0 lines
(3+1) (116)
- The number of lines in net 8 is 2.

ACT
Net A +I- SUB 49 0011
DISP
0003

Screen displa! section

, . . . . ..
I 0300

000
1 0000 0000 0000
003 0000 0000 0000
006 0000 0000 0000
009 0000 0000

Net B

: ....... :
Net C

c) Examples of symptoms
Example of symptom (a-l)
- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the total number of message data steps
parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396. This is because when
the total number of steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.
If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more is created during mnemonic
editing, the following message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.
The data table is too large.

-42-
 4. OPERATION

Example of symptom (a-2)

- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function instruction on the same screen as
that of a basic instruction, the following message is displayed, and the attempt is
rejected.
The NET being created is too large.
For example, if the basic instruction net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8)
cannot be entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds 70). The results of
calculation are described below.

Dtsplay screen

L+
1
:-I
68-line net

RST Number of MOVE

+I SUB 8 instruction lines =
number of parameters
(4) + 1 = 5 .

:. : 68 + 5 = 73 lines

< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the MOVE instruction can be entered.

- A baste tnstructton net cannot be entered together with another basic-instruction net, if
the total number of lines is greater than 70.

For example, if a 68-line basic-Instruction net is followed by another basic-Instruction net,

the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.

rr ] 68-line net
Display screen

---I+ No more lines can

be entered.
I

< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net IS not scrolled, the latter basic instruction can be entered

When the CODB instructron (SUB 27) and DISP instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the
same screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message data
steps for the DISP Instructton (SUB 49). the following message appears. and the

-43-
 4. OPERATION

attempt is rejected.
The NET being created is too large.

This symptom also occurs In a combination of two DISP instructions and a combination of
CODB and COD instructions.
For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200, the total number of
steps for the DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The calculation results are
shown below.

4 bytes
200 data tables

Number of CODB
. instruction lines = 55 -

I
Function instruction
Display screen
.._...... ._.. ._ section = 4 parameters
+1
196 00000000 00000000
Data table section
198 00000000 00000000 = 20014 = 50

Calculation of DISP
_ instruction data items -
that can be entered

Function instruction
sections = 3 parameters
+ 1
Number of remaining
lines = 70 - 55 - 4
= 11 lines
. .
Data tables
= 116=66

< Measure >

Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen makes it possible to set the
total number of steps to 396.

0 Restriction on the maximum number of steps

The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows:
Without EMS : 21840 steps
With EMS : 24000 steps
Note, however, that the maxrmum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending
on how memory is used.
If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable number of steps, editing is
disabled and the following message is displayed:
MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

-44-
 4. OPERATION

[Notes]
0) An attempt IO scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the
ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.

8 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.
However. this restriction does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic
format. When a sequence program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is
displayed over several lanes with a continuation symbol.
This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with ( -- --- 1. Use (Delnet] (net
deletion) to delete this symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

(4 Replacing sections of a sequence program

Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced rn the same way as described
in Item (c) above.
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter new data.

@I Sequence program addition

Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys
indicated below.
To terminate the programmer menu, press the < ESC 7 key.

I iflrmt oekl@Jt Insert Adren Search COPY MOW File rygdtt I

I Insert 1

As described below, there are four types of sequence program addition in a ladder diagram.

(i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line

l Addilion on a line

HH-

t
To be added

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter item(s) in the way described in
Item (c) above.

-45-
 4. OPERATION

l When a vertical line affects addition

[Operation]
Move the cursor to the position shown above.

Press [ 4_ ] to delete the vertical line to the left extending upward. This
disappears.

Press [ J ] to create a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor,
then press [ - 1. A horizontal line and vertical line are created.

Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact is to be added.

Press [ -_I + ] to add a contact.

(ii) When a line is added vertically

iii+-
_
.

N- To be added

To add a line vertically, an area is required for the addition. To create such an area, the
lower part of the ladder diagram must be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the
cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]
key.
Each time the [insnetj key is pressed, the lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted one
line down to create an area for addition. Make an addition in this area.
After line addition, any remaining area (as In the case where two lines are added in an area
large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation]
Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed Ilnes.

Press [insnet].
The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.

-46-
 4. OPERATION

When the [insnet) key IS pressed without entering a numeric value, one line is Inserted.

When the [rnsnet] key IS pressed after entering a numeric value, the number of lines
specified is inserted.

Move the cursor to the desired position and press [ -_1 f--j. Then set address data
and press the <Enter > key. The the cursor moves right.

Press the [ L ] soft key to create an OR circuit

(iii) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.

(Operation]
0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the (inslin] key. The entered
number of lines is inserted.
(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

-v- -1
4 Cursor

If the (insltn] key IS pressed when the cursor is posttioned as shown In the left-hand
figure. a blank line is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure.

(iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program

Elements are added one by one.

[Operation]
0 Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press the [inselmj key. The entered
number of elements is Inserted.
If the character c A> is prefixed to the number of elements to be Inserted and the
[inselm] key IS pressed. elements are inserted after the cursor.
(If the [Inselm] key IS pressed without entering the number of elements to be inserted,
just one element is inserted.)

II e .. ..,(..,.
. II
1, I

-47-
 4. OPERATION

II the (inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand
figure, an element is inserted as shown in the following figure. The element is inserted
before the cursor.

If the character <A > is entered and the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is
placed as shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-
hand figure. The element is inserted after the cursor.

(1) Deletion in a sequence program

(i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted
and pressing one of the below three soft keys

[ _____ ] : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay coil, etc.

I 4 ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the left of the cursor.

I 2 ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor.

(ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an RD instruction to a WRT
instruction).

(iii) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

in&net Reklai lfisert &dress Serrrh &.&. MWQ ..ki;e., SjrBiiR

[Delnet] 1

[Operation]
0 Deletion
Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the (Delnet] key. The net to be
deleted is displayed in red.

G? Deletino multiple nets

Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, or [search]
key, then display the nets to be deleted in red. If the [c-down] key is pressed after a
numeric value is entered. the cursor moves as many times as the entered numeric
value.

-48-
 4. OPERATION

0 Execution : Press the [exec] key.

Cancellation : Press the [cancel] key.
Deletion except : Press the [exclud] key. Exclude nets except specified nets in 8.
specified nets

r4, When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to
delete, enter the number of nets to delete, then press the [Delnet] key. With this
operatron. steps ci) and 8 can be omitted.

(g) Searching in a sequence program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

[Search] J

U) Itop
When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is drsplayed on the screen
and the cursor is moved to the start of the program.

(ii) [bottom]
When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and
the cursor is moved to the end of the program.

(iii) [srch]
Search operatton using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the
current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When an address
IS found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for can be specified in one of
two ways.

CiJ Address specrfication usrnq the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]
key. Thus operatron searches the program for the specified address from the current
location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
If the specified address is found, the sectron of the program containg the address is
displayed on the screen. The cursor IS automatically positioned at the found address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move.
To terminate searching, press the < ESC > key.

-49-
 4. OPERATION

x2.0 F54.1 Y52.3 G11.6

I
-;+@ri@#%?. Cl
035.3 .(
I, - When the same address as this address
II
is to be searched for, move the cursor to
G17.2 X4.2 Y49.1
this position, then press the [srch] key.

x14.0 032.0
+I
F54.1 b G43.1

- When the same address is found,

the cursor moves to this location.
x0.5 D21.2

G3 Address soecification by address inout

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press the [srch] key. .
This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location
of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When the specified address is found, the section of the program containing the address
is displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found
address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears.

(iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with a specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil
is found, it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the
closest to the cursor is displayed
The address of a relay coil to search for can be specilied in one of two ways.

Ci> Address soecification usino the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to search for, then press the [w-
srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program
containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error
indication appears.

Q Address spectfication bv address input

Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the [w-
srchj key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils wrth the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

- 50 -
 4. OPERATION

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program
containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error
Indication appears.

(v) [n-srch] (net-number search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of
the screen. If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number, the display is
advanced by one net.

(vi) [s-srch ] (function-instruction search)

This key searches for function instructions. Searching is performed by entering a function
instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key IS pressed
while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as
that function instruction are searched for.

(vii)Search operation using the cursor keys (< c *, < -+ >)

l Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The address is searched for.
l Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is searched for.
l Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number,
then press a cursor key. The function instruction is searched for.
Example: Enter Sl, then press a cursor key. The function instruction END1 is
searched for,

(viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)

When the source program type is FORMAT-B/C, global searching in all main/sub-
programs is enabled.

l The range of search

All programs, whrch rnclude a currently dtsplayed subprogram, are searched for.
The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address.
a) From the current cursor posttion to bottom of currently opening subprogram.
b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.
c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is small next to a).
d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

-51-
 4. OPERATION

G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the c ESC > key or the [cancel] key.

1st net of LEVEL1

Whole
program

- Final net of the maximum numbered subprogram

-1
(Searching in the order of 0 -@)
.

l Searching result
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position.
In case of finding in another program, the program which is currently displayed will be
closed.
Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object
position with the cursor.
At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are
modifications in the program to be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed in order of 1) one
by one.

- 52 -
 4. OPERATION

l Operation
The global search is operated with the following functton key.

,,;~+.$-s+~ 4-4 5 -t&&t* 6 -..-L-,~L~_a t@r .+_ s +r. j ,o&~er)

(cornand]
J

8 [comand]

i insnet 2 D&net 3 in5Qtt 4 AdrQSj, 5 %arctI 6 Copy 7 &lrruc 8 Fk 9 iyhdlt lo

d) Select the (G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 03

1 2 3

1 2

(Shortcut command is -z G > + [COMMAND])

4 Starting of G-SRCH mode

It switches to the mode of G-SRCH by the operation of 0) +O.
After that, all programs are searched unless quitting G-SRCH mode.

b) Execution of search
Refer to (c) [search](d) [w-srch]/(e) [s-srch] in (7)Searching in a sequence
program, for how to specify the target of global search.

c) End of G-SRCH mode

G-SRCH mode is ended by pushing <ESC > or [cancel] key. The end method is
different individually.
- <ESC> = Only G-SRCH mode is ended. The program on the opening now
is the state as it is.
- [cancel] = It returns to the program which was opened at beginning the G-
SRCH mode. The program on the opening now closes.
Whether will save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are
modifications in the program which is currently displayed.

PI Copying sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net. Specify the net to be copied. The
net can be copied tn the same file that is being edited or into another file. The selected net
remains as it was.

- 53 -
 4. OPERATION

File which is being edited

Specified file
(COPY 1
Range to be copied

[until]

Fig. 4.5.2.2 (b)

I to cancel sear& c-down Pup &fil tu-arg

[Operation]
Copying a net
Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net is
displayed in yellow.

Copying two or more nets

To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be
copied, then move the cursor to the net at the other end of the range to be copied by
pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], [c-down], or [search] key. The selected nets
are displayed in yellow.
Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c-up] or [c-down] key. The cursor
moves according to the specified value.

Setting the net or nels to be copied

Press the [until] key.

Specllying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying the net or nets in the same
file)
Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the [to] key. The
selected net or nets are copied immediately above the copy destination specified bv the

- 54-
 4. OPERATION

cursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times, enter the number of times
they are to be copied before pressing the [to] key.

Specifying the copy destination using the (to-fill key (Copying the net or nets into another
file)
1) Press the (to-fill key. The following message is displayed.

If no program is specified. LATMP is created.

,.

(LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing)

2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be copied and press the < Enter >
key.
3) Select desired processing from the following POP-UP menu:

4) If the selected destination file is present, the following POP-UP menu is dispfayed.
Select desired processing from the menu.

---t Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the
previous data of the file.
- Cancels output to the selected file.
- Appends the copy to the selected file.

If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the cursor on the first net to be
copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps 0, a,
and 0 can be skipped.

(Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

(0 Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be moved net by net. Specify the net or nets to be
copied. The selected net or nets can be moved to another place in the same file that is being
edited or output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.
The only difference between copying and moving IS that the selected net or nets are deleted rn
moving.

fnznet Oelfiet Wart Adrew karch COPV Mawe Pile it&B

[Move]

uirtll cancel search c-down C-U&l

- 55-
 4. OPERATION

[Operation]
Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to Q for copying.

(Note) Incorrect nets cannot be moved.

(i) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited.
The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to
the original source program that is being edited.

Original screen View screen

File being edited

P-01
[Sourcefiie- (original file) Combine File to be IVfEWJ combined
combined (view file)
Input

Section to be edited

Fig. 4.5.2.2 (c) Combining a Sequence Program

Programs of model which is different from the specified model can be specified to the files of
connection (TO] or enter [VIEW]. (If a disagreement is found, a warning message is
displayed.)
In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to be combined contains an address
range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error
will be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warning message, be extremely careful to
continue the operation.

-56-
 4. OPERATION

(i) Function keys

[Comand]

I itwhet Delnet Insert A&en Mitch COPY Mbw?

; Flli . ::...
i@llt

r
d
SIIWPLE YO 0
-+ t------- __-_ - ---_c+-

I
I
~334~5ulumm3rn331~
rRD=
1SY=
cco-
wao1 RCO=

-___ _

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File] Command

- 57 -
 4. OPERATION

(ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Start ladder diagram

editing (original screen)

1
Specify an Insertion point (The
data is inserted Immediately
above the cursor.)

Press the [File] key

r_lrC1T7
Specify

<POP-UP
a view file

menu
1 (View)

Shows the ladder < Combines the(To)file with

diagram of the file to be the Ladder program on
combined (View screen) the original screen

1. Check the displayed 1. The file is

data of the file to be immediately
combined combined. The
2. Edit the data of the data of the file is
file to be combined not displayed.
L
and combine it
_I

on the view screen

Press the -z ESC z= key to terminate editing

-z POP-UP menu
(Quit) *I (Edit)
t (Save) (Temp)

Saves the Ladder Cancels the Saves the data Returns to the ladder
program shown on the edited data in a provisional diagram screen (The
view screen - work file view screen is
L continued.)

*l: The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.

Fig. 4.5.2.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

-58-
 4. OPERATION

(iii) Examples

Example 1. Combrning a sequence program file

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the -z Enter > key.

From the following menu, select Fl (To).

/I

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step QI>. (Original
screen)

Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program

(Operation]
til Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

G3 Select (File].

3 Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the < Enter > key.

6.9 From the following menu, select F2 (View).

jiil

@ Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. To terminate editing, press the
<ESC> key. (Ladder editing can be performed and terminated in the
conventional way.)

- 59 -
 4. OPERATION

From the following menu, select Fl (Save).

Fl Save (update)
F2 Quit
F3 Rename & Save
F4 Edit
F5 Create Latemp file

Return to the screen of step @ and check the name of the file output in step $3.
Then, select Fl (To).

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original
screen)

Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence program

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the < Enter > key.

From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).

Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify a desired range with
[until].

From the following function menu, select (to-org]. (Specify insertion into the
original screen.)

[until]

to cancel search c-down c-up to-fil to-org

From the following menu, select Fl (Exec)

The data is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original
screen)

-6O-
 4. OPERATION

(k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing screen
On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment added at the specified address
can be edited.

[syEdit]

[Operation]
Specifying an address
To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the cursor on the corresponding
address and press the [syEdit] key.

Editing the symbol and comment

The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom right part of the screen. Edit
the symbol and press the <Enter > key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

Terminating editing
[exec] key : Terminates editrng after modifying the data.
[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the data.

(1) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key

Each function key can be directly selected with the [cornand] key. Enter one of the character
strings below. then press the [cornand] function key. Those portions that are enclosed in
brackets can be omitted.

I (nsert) D (elnet) (SY) E W

S (earth) C (OPY)
M (ove) F (ile)

The function keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.

(Note) The keys 1c or 4.) and [A or-4 ] are used to create or delete a vertical line
extending upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical
line is for creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. The menu item applying
to a function key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.

-61 -
 4. OPERATION

(m) ZOOM
Subprograms called by the currently selected programs issuing of a CALLCALLU instruction
can easily be referenced and edited.

(i) Start up of zoom

0 Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALLCALLU instruction and push the
<Enter > key.

ROOl .O ACT
IL - SUB65 PO01
CALL

@ The program now on opening hides from the editing screen. Then the subprogram
which is specified by the parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.

(ii) Start up under editing

When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the preservation of modificatibns will
be inquired. Select either

(ii,) End
When the end operation with the < ESC > key is attempted in the program editing screen
by ZOOM, it will return to the state when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to
return to the program configuration screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

~1 Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Rename,save & quit
F4 Edrt
F5 Main

Fl :Save(update) & quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current
program screen is preserved.

F2:Quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current
program screen IS cancelled.

-62 -
 4. OPERATION

@ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the area for comment enclosed by
(* and ) is inserted.
Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and type comment sentence onto
the area.
The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines
display mode) automatically according to the comment sentences. Every Net comment
can expands up to a hundred lines.

RlOOl .o R1000.2 Y2000.4

A

R120.3
X-+ character cursor
(* Net comment is written in here. 1 )
(* All characters you can enter are available. )

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4

A
----IMI

(ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

@I To determtne the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or <ESC>. Then the editing
comment is fixed, and the Net comment editing mode is finished.

@ To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The new Net comment will be
cancelled and erased.

Note) The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one
ASCII character as one byte, one Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character
as two bytes.
Line feed is also available on Net comment. Line feed is helpful to save memory
for Net comment.

(iir) To modify Net comment

0 Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press
< Shift z= + [netcmt 1 or < Enter > The Net comment ediling mode becomes active,
and the Net comment will be ready to modify its contents.

@ At Net comment editing mode, to Insert a blank line tnto Net comment, press [inslin].

( Net comment is written in here. 7

( All characters you can enter are available. 7

- 64 -
 4. OPERATION

[inslin] will shrfl irnes at the cursor and after down by one line, and make a blank line
at the cursor position.

( Net comment is written in here. )

( )
( All characters you can enter are available. l)
( *)

(3 At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].

(* Net comment is written in here. l)

( Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. )
( All characters you can enter are available. )
( )

[dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one
line.

( Net comment is written in here. l)

( All characters you can enter are available. l)
@I To exit from Net comment editing mode, press ( end 1 or < ESC >.

@ To cancel the modifications you have just made, press [cancel]. [cancel] will abandon
the modifications and the Net comment will be restored as it was before the
modifications.

(iv)To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment

0 Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.

[command] + [Delnet] + specify area to delete -x [exec]

0 Entering Net comment editing mode by <Shift > + [netcmt] or <Enter > with the
cursor on the Net comment which you want to delete. and then press [delete].

(v) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of posttion in sequence program which is called
Net comment pointer, and Net comment string data which is comment sentences
themselves. These two elements are usually combined one to one to make a Net
comment, but the partner might be lost by illegal file operations or something, such as
copying the ladder file .#LA or modifying the Net comment data file NETCMT.000 by
user. When a Net comment pointer loses its Net comment string data, the Net comment is
called Lost Net comment.
Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment enclosed by ( and ) which is
displayed in purple or dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be
normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be edited as a normal Net
comment, such as deletion, copying and so on.

-65-
 4. OPERATION

(p) To edit New page

It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. This specification of
the position is called New page, and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

0) To enter New page

0 Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press <Shift > +

1 page 1.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4

A

R120.3
zJ+
R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4
+Ht n
v

@ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4 .

A
R120.3
=LI
<New page>

R1OO1.O R 1000.2 Y23.4

----1Hl n

(ii) Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. The operations such as
copying [ Copy 1, moving ( Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective on
New page.

(q) Terminating editing of a sequence program

[Operation]
0 Press the < ESC > key on the following editing screen.

- 66 -
 4. OPERATION

The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

a) Fl :Save(update) & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended.

b) F2:Quit
Alter current content of the editing is cancelled. the editing screen will be ended.

c) FB:Rename,save & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the
editing screen will be ended.

d) F4:Edit
The < ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

e) F5:Main
With the operation a).b) or c). it returns to the program screen where ZOOM
was started But with this operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at all
once from the nested state.

Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the program configuration screen,
the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.

When error net exists

When the error net exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed and the end menu is not
displayed. Cope thts case by the following.

a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released. the end
operation will be done.

b) When pressed < ESC> key in the state of 0 after CAN is typed (meaning of
CANCEL), the menu of 8 will be displayed.
- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after removing the error net.
- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the state before editing by
cancelling the content of the editing.

-67-
 4. OPERATION

(3) Step sequence diagram

Position the cursor to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or < Enter > key.
The step sequence editing screen is displayed as shown below:

ZDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

Cl s3 0 Sll cl s13 Cl s21 0 s31

P3
0 s4

n s15 0 S24
r======================I=I
l-l

_. 1 (Note 1)
Note 1) The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.
The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen
and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is positioned to
any element on the screen.

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed, depending on the position of the
cursor.

When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is displayed.

I I I + L4
n1 s2 III SlQ Cl s20 L-1 s30

r1 1111 1 II I + JMP + LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

[ Cl ] : Step subprogram ( +-LBL ] : Label for jump

( [Ll] ] : initial step subprogram I -I- I: The end of block step
[ rl] ] : Block step subprogram [ FUNC ] : Various functions

I I ] : Line for link [ CHK ] : Grammatical checking

[ -+JMP ] : Jump to label [ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

-68-
 4. OPERATION

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

P30
t

1== 1 f-.- (f-1 FUNC CHK ZOOM

I t 1 : Transition

I l- I : Divergence of selective sequence

1 l= = 1 : Divergence of simultaneous sequence

I I I : Line for link

I t- 1 : Convergence of selective sequence

1 T= = 1 : Convergence of simultaneous sequence

I 1 :
[ FUNC I : Various functions
[ CHK 1 : Grammatical checking
[ ZOOM I : Zooming into a subprogram

(i) Entering a step

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key.
Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [rl) key causes a step to be created, as shown below

A free step number is automatically assigned.

I
q Sl
t

STEP : Sl
ACTION :
l-l

u 101 I:1
1 I + JMP +- LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

The specified subprogram number (Pi0 in thus example) is displayed below Sl.

-69-
 4. OPERATION

STEP : 61
ACTION : PlO
l-l

To change the step number, press the <Enter > key to position the character cursor on
STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.

STEP : Sl(f
ACTION : PlO
l-l

(ii) Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key
Enter a subprogram number

Press the [ + 1 key.

I
InI Sl

PLO0
+
ACTION :
l-2

[ f I+_Il==l I It-_l FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a subprogram number.

I
[l3lsl

PlOO
+
ACTION : PlOO
l-2

-7o-
 4. OPERATION

(vii) Specifying a label for jump destination

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [c LBL] key.
Then, enter a label name.

Press the I+- LBL] key.

Ii-
WI Sk
PI0

I- PlOO

LABEL : Llo
l-l

II [l.ll I II I + JMP + LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a label name.

STEP : $1
ACTION : PlO
l-1

-73-
 4. OPERATION

(viii) Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the dewed input position (step line), then press the [- JMPJ key.
Then, enter a label name.

Press the [- JMP] key.

t LlO
[OISl

to
I

Ells2

f PlOO .-

LEBEL :
2-3

0 [Ul 01 I --*JMP +-LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a label name.

1
+ LlO
[UlSl

PlOO PlOO

I--T-
cl]S2 --, tY.cl

t PlOO

LEBEL : Llo
2-3

-74-
 4. OPERATION

Deleting an element
Position the cursor to the element to be deleted. then press the < Delete > key.

In the example shown above. two figures (elements) of a selective branch and transition are
selected Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse
video. To position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the <Delete > key. To
restore the state shown above. press the (ESC] key.

-- PlOO

If the <Enter > key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective branch is deleted and
the following screen is displayed:

c
IO] Sl

PlOtt

-75-
 4. OPERATION

To specify another figure, press the < Delete > key again.

I
IO1 Sl

PlQO
i

Inserting an element
Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the c Insert > key. To create
an empty row, press the <Insert > key.
To create an empty column, press the [Shift] and <Insert > keys

I
IO1 Sl

c
,;,=
==i====;
dlS2 I1 SlO Cl s20

P2 PlO P20

IP1l t
n s3 n Sll n s21
I I I

STEP : S2
ACTION : P200
1-3

-76-
 4. OPERATION

Press the < Insert > key.

c PI

1-3

Press the (Shift] and < Insert > key.

c
101 Sl

Pl
============
I I I
rllS2 n SlO i-l s20

P2 PlO P20

t t t
Ll s3 r3 Sll Ll s21
I I I
STEP : s2
ACTION : P102
l-3

- 77 -
 4. OPERATION

(xi) Search

Pl
~,=y== i ==== ; =

ols2 El SlO cl s20

Pl Pll P21

;. 1 t
u SlO 0 s20
ciilS2 I I

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the stale shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed as
shown below:

l-7
Fl Search
F2 COPY
F3 Move
F4 mAin
F5 List
I I

Ells3 El Sll 0 s21

Press the (Fl] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t Pl
===========

uls3 F6 Toe

I jP7180ttoln

-78-
 4. OPERATION

Then, press the [Fl] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t Pl

.xb

La search string:%Ai
I
SI

Position
Toe
Bottom

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then press the <Enter> key.
The system starts searching through the part subsequent to the cursor.

Fl Se
F2 Co F1

;: ",; ;:
F5 Li %:

(xii) Copying or moving an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

Pl
===========
f I I
IYISZ L_) SlO 1-J s20

Pl Pll P21

I t t

-79-
 4. OPERATION

When the [FBI (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

Pl
t
PI=========

Fl Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
F5 List
:

Press the (F2) (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.

Pl
t
=========PI
I I
L71s2 cl SlO Ll s20

Pl Pll P21
i......+ 1
ACTION :
Specify Start position l-2

Posltion the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example shown below), then
press the <Enter > key. The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.

l-t Pl
===========
I I
13JS2 cl s10 17 s20

Pl Pll P21
i + t
ACTION :
Specify End position 2-3

-8O-
 4. OPERATION

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then
press the < Enter > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

Pl
t
===PIIP===I

ACTION :
SpeciEy End position 3-4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3 in the example shown below),
then press the < Enter > key. The specified part is copied.

t
==I=====

ACTION : PlOO
4-3

When a part is copied,

- The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.
- The P address is copied. If required, change the address.

-81 -
 4. OPERATION

(xiir) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program configuration screen (MAIN).
To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when editing was started, follow the
procedure below. The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram,
from which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.
The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

Pl
(t
t==========
I I
UlS2 17 SlO u s20

Pl Pll P21

i t t

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

I+ Pl
===========

After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

a PO(fOl 0 PO002 n PO004 u PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007
u PO008 fl PO009 n PO014 0 PO015 fl PO016 0 PO017
n]POO21 cl PO022 n PO024 0 PO025 fl PO026 q ]POO27
. . .
. .
t~jPO101 c-1 PO202 01PO304 tT]]PO405 a]PO406 u]PO407

-82-
 4. OPERATION

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key Other keys

[ MAIN ] :Displaying the subprogram < Page up > : Displaying previous screen
configuration screen < Page down > : Displaying next screen
[ CHANGE ] :Creating a new subprogram
(ZOOM J :Modifying a subprogram

Screen display

U]P200

The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the [ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the
program to a certain depth, the subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in
which they are nested. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed first is
displayed at the left end.

I0 PO008 (ii PO009 c~] PO014 0 PO015 fl PO016 0 PO017 I

Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently being edited are listed with the
following mark: :
0 : Ladder subprogram
cl] : Step sequence subprogram

(xv) Checking the syntax

Press the [CHK] key.

Pl
It

i
I I
cl162 II SlO Ll s20

Pl Pll P21

t t

-84-
 4. OPERATION

When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram
which is to be edited.

Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited

cl Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

01 Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

n1 block step sequence subprogram step sequence subprogram

t Transition Ladder subprogram

(xvii) End of modifying

Press the [ESC] key.

Pl
t
==I========

Fl Save(update) h quit
F2 Quit
F3 Edit
F4 Rename, save b quit
F5 Optimize

I I I

Menus

Menu Editing Result of editing Display

Save End Updated Optimized

Quit End Discarded -

Edit Continue Continued Not optimized

Rename End Updated Optimized

optimize I Continue I Optimized and continued I Optimized

-86-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.2.3 Symbol & comment editing

l Moving the cursor

< t >, < + >, CT >. < 1 > Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.

<Shift> + <t>,<-+> Moves the cursor to another position within the field to
be edited.

l Entering a comment in Japanese

When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment can be entered in
Japanese. When a comment containing kana characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is
compiled (an object file is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric characters
are replaced with spaces.

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

8 The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

COIL_COMWENTB88BBBBB/8BBOBBlL
RDDRESS SYMBOL RELRV CONMENI COIL COHNENT

~ Xlwm3.8 SYMBOL-A' RELQV COliNENl-fl

COIL C6NNENTki

Fig. 4.5.2.3

- 87 -
 4. OPERATION

(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is
assigned.

[Operation]
m Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

8 An input window opens on the screen.

t t t t
Address field Symbol field Relay COmmenl Coil comment field

0 Enter an address in the address entry field.

$9 The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field

0 Enter symbol data.

45) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.

G9 Enter relay comment data.

@I The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field.

(9 Enter coil comment data.

@I The entered data is stored, clearing the previous address, symbol data, and comment data
from the window.

When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is automatically set to receive new
data.

(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited

[Operation]
(1) If the system is set to receive new data, select (QUIT] to exit from that state.

8 Move the cursor by pressing the < + >, < + >, < ? >, or < 1 ) key and edit the data

To move the cursor withln a field, while pressing the < Shift > key press the -z t) or < + >
key.

- 88 -
 4. OPERATION

(4) Moving a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

8 Select [DELETE].

0 The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

@ Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

0 Select [PASTE]

(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation]
Ct> Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

8 Select [COPY].

0 The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

@ Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

@ Select (PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address

[Operation]
0 Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

@ The following input window appears on Ihe screen.

SEARCH :

CO Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data number.

-89-
 4. OPERATION

6% The system searches for the symbol or address and the data number in that order. The
cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the NO field.

8 Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are deleted

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment

[Operation ]
@ Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field

8 Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.

8 Select IAREA]. The entrre line is displayed in reverse video, and the following
message appears on the screen.

Selectrng the area

0 Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

@ Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is deleted.

(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]
0) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the < ESC> key

8 The following message appears on the screen:

Fl Save (update) 8 quit

F2 Quit
F3 Edit

0 Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu

-9o-
 4. OPERATION

(9) Editing screen

+Symbol entry number --) Coil comment size (byte)

CRT/MD1 can display / Total CRT/MD1 can display / Total
I
EDIT ( SYMBOL b COMMENT ) PMC-RB4 <O>[A:vFLYDATAYRB4 I

+YYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT F (Motel)
I I I I I I
00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA
00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB
00003*X00000.2 CCCCC cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc
1
I*' means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

,; ..j 2 s;e#tfl 3 .::.#@A : 4 ADD 5 :;;:,:i$

.,...I
6 &TE.. , ,;,;.,.:I
.,
::.a &$&i I,.::
9 ;..&&&",c, &$' '..
..,
:. ...

Note 1) It is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with turning at this point in ladder
diagram editing screen.

(10) Searching by a part of strings

Search function is active for specified field, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOURELAY or COIL
COMMENT.
Especially you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, by specifing a part of data
strings.
1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search.
Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the undermentioned.

I1 NO. 2 AORS 3 SYMbQL 4 RELAY 5 .&tl,. 6 . , ,. : .: .: 8 ,I 1.

,:I. 9 1...... .: . ,o :. ,,
I

2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by function-key.
A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.

-9l-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.2.4 Message editing

An arbitrary message can be displayed on the CRT/MD1 screen of the CNC, using the DISPB
instruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such a message is created as
described below.

(1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used

The types of characters usable in message data vary lrom one CNCPMC model to another, as
listed below.

Characters that can be entered

CNCPMC JIS levels 1 Full-size Half -size Alphanumeric

and 2 hiragana katakana characters

PMC-Rf33RB4/RB5/RB6/
F16 n 0 0 0
RC3IRC4

F18 PMC-RA3 n 0 0 0

F15B PMCNBINB2 X X 0 0

Power
PMC-PA3 X X 0 0
Mate
- . -. . . . ._ -.--. _----.
(A : Some characters cannot be drsplayed. I hey cannot be checked by t-API LAUUtH.)

The half-srze kana and alphanumenc characters can be entered using the kana and alphanumeric
keys on the keyboard. Similarly to symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited
usrng the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number of characters is limited
as follows:

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used : 62 characters

2) When only half-size kana characters are used : 127 characters

3) When only alphanumeric characters are used : 256 characters

(2) Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNCiPMC model in which Japanese
language (excluding half-size characters) can be used and other models. This section
describes the procedure common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered),
using the PMC-RC4 as an example.

(a) Startup

[Operation ]
(1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu.

-92-
 4. OPERATION

8 The following message data edit screen appears.

EDIT W&AGE)
_~
IO ADDRESS NSSAGE
___-
001 AOO.0 1234567890ABCOEFCHIJUMOPWSTllWYZ1234567890AlKDEFGHIJKlM~ST
UVWXYZ1234567890AKDEFGHIJKUR(DFQRSTUYWXYZ

002 AOO. I

003 A00.2

004 A00.3

Fig. 452.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen

(b) Input

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered

Q Key in the desired message data

(c) Modification

[Operation]
(11 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

8 The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.

0 Place the cursor at the location where modification is required, using the cursor keys.

@iI Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.

0 Press the <Enter > key.

(d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]
0) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

8 The cursor moves to the start or end message address.

-93-
 4. OPERATION

(e) END

[Operation)
0 On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

8 The following message appears.

0 Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

452.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit IS set and deleted as described below.

(1) Startup

[Operation]
0 Select [MODULE] (l/O module) from the edit menu.

Q The following I/O module edit screen appears.

ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS CROUP BASE SLOT NME

x0000 IDl6C YOODO

x0001 lD16C YDOOI
x0002 YODOZ
x0003 YDDO3
x0004 YDW
x0005 YOOOS
X0006 vooD6
XODDI vooo7
x0008 YOOOB
x0009 YOOO9
XOOIO YOOIO
x0011 YODll
x0012 YDD12
x0013 YDD13
x0014 YOOl4
x0015 YOO15

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (a) I0 Module Edit Screen

-94-
 4. OPERATION

EDIT II/O MDDULE) \B&

ICHANNEL 11

1 ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAUE ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAUE I

xoooo 0 Do PX YOoilO
xoool i 00 ux YOoill
x0002 0 i ux YOoO2
x0003 0 0 ii x(1 YGilO3
x0004 YooO4
x0005 0 0 01 XI Yooo5
X0006 YOOo6
x0007 YOoO7
XGQOE YOOo6
xOiw9 YOO09
x0010 YOOIO
XOOII YOOll
x0012 YOO12
x0013 Yoo13
x0014 YOol4
x0015 YOOIS

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (b) I/O Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one cl annel can be set)

(2) Channel switching (only for models in which more than one channel can be set) .

(I) To switch to the next channel:

[Operation]
0 Select [NXT.CH].

(ii) To switch to the previous channel:

[Operation)
0 Select [PRV.CH].

(3) Setting

(Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

8 Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1) The module name that can be specified may vary depending on the model of the PMC
or l/O unit. Selecting [HELP] can display the module names that can be displayed in
the NAME field.

(Note 2) The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:

GROUP : Specify a group number in the configuration.
BASE : Must be fixed at 0.
SLOT : Specify the unit number of the I,0 Unit-B. Alternatively, set to 0 if
power ON/OFF information ## is to be allocated.
 4. OPERATION

[Input item]
COUNTER DATA TYPE
This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR
function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

lnitral value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder
levels. This setting reduces ladder scan time, thus achieving high-speed ladder
execution.

Initial value 100 Setting range 1 to 150

I
The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution penod of 8
ms.

First and second level processing time

Note however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels
reduces the following processing times:
l PMC screen display time
l Language program processing time
l Ladder processing time on the third level

LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO

As the language program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this
parameter specifies the percentage of the following processing times:
l PMC screen display time
l Language program processing time
l Processing time of third-level Ladder program
While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed cyclically.

Initial value 50 Setting range 0 to 99

I

-99-
 4. OPERATION

LANGUAGE ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a
language program.

I Initial value 000000

I
Setting range Address
area
in the language program storage
I

When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.

OPERATOR PANEL (connectinq an FO machine operators panel)

This parameter specifies whether a machine operators panel is used with the FSO.
When YES is specified in this parameter, specify the DVDO addresses where the
operators panel is actually connected, an address for key images transferred from the
operators panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred to the operators panel.

itial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO 1 1 : YES

I

0 KEY DI ADDRESS
Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DI where the operators
panel is actually connected.

Settrng range X0 to X127, Xl000 to X1019

ii) KEY DO ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operators
panel is actually connected.

Setting range YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014

iii) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

- loo-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.3 Printout

4.5.3.1 Overview

A sequence program can be printed out.

(1) Compatible printers

This software is usable with the printers listed below.

EPSON VP1 000 (default setting)

NEC PR201H
FANUC PRINTER

(Note) To use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER, a program modilication is required. For
derails. see Section 4.5.3.6.

(2) General flow of operation for printout.

IOffline

[PRINT]
<F2>

(Specifyoutput

t [SETUP]

Fig. 4.5.3.1 Operation Flow of Printout

- 101-
 4. OPERATION

453.2 Starting and ending printing

Printing is performed according to the following procedure.

SYSIEM PRRAWETER
SYMBOL 8 COMWFNI

LROOER OIRGRRH
[OPTION1
STEP SEOUENCE OIRGRRH INOm1
IOPTIONI
I/O HOOULt
HESSRGE
'"PTIONI
CROSS REFERENCF LIST
8%
BII ROORESS MRP 'ml1
rurlION1

Fig. 4.5.3.2 Drawing Output Menu

(Operation]
ci, Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (See Section 4.5.3.4.)

b, Set the desired output items. (See Section 4.5.3.3.)

CZ Start printing by pressrng Fl (PRINT].

m Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.

C! Press FlO [END] or the < Esc > key to terminate the print menu display.

Note 1) Perform steps iI> and 8 only when the settings must be changed.

Note 2) Some print formats that cannot be set in step 0) may be set by editing the setting
file before starting FAPT LADDER-II. For details, see Section 4.535.

-102-
 4. OPERATION

453.3 Output item setting

Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More than one item can be
specified at a time. Some set items may not be displayed, depending on the model of the PMC.

(1) Specifying output of each data item

Specify whether a data item is to be output, by pressing the < 7 > key or < 1 > key after
positioning the cursor with the < c > key or c + > key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option specification

When specifying a data item for which options are available, position the cursor to the desired
option, then press the < Enter :, key. The option specification screen will appear. To set the
option, enter the desired value, then press the < Enter > key.

(3) Detail of each data time

a) Title printing
The data of the title is printed.
b) Parameter printing
The data of the system parameters is printed.
c) Symbol printing
The symbol comment data is printed.

:\DRTF!\SflWPLE
1

I SYMBOL PRINT 1

STRRT LINE NUMBER ,rn

END LINE NUMBER 8
APPOINT COWHENT r~coIL/RLLl

FlB ( ESC 1 END

Fig. 453.3 (a) Symbol Print Option Menu

- 103 -
 4. OPERATION

i) Option (symbol printing)

. When printing symbol/comment data, specify an output range. When 0 is
specified as the print end line number, all data up to the last line is printed.
. Comment specification
[RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.
[COIL] : Prints coil comment data.
[ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil comment data.

d) Ladder diagram printing

A ladder diagram is printed.

r--

END
_-
J

Fig. 4.533 (b) Ladder Print Option Menu

i) Optton (ladder diagram printing)

The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder
diagram to be printed are specified.
If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a
module.
If 0 is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, printing
continues up to the last net.
If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the ladder diagram at
every new file or subprogram.
If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is accompanied with a
cross-reference. (Fig. 4.5.3.3 (h))
Relay information
[SYMBOL] : Prints symbol data.
[RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data.

- 104-
 4. OPERATION

e) Printing of step sequence figure

Step sequence figure is printed
i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)

:\DtllA\SRWPLE
I

I STEP SEDUENCE PAINT 1

PRINT UNIT oRLLn5m5l

MODULE NM
SUE-PRDGRRM NUMBER r~/vEsl

FlB t tsc I END

,-a3333momm -__-

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu

. PRINT UNIT
Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for a single subprogram
or all subprograms. When printing a figure for a single subprogram, specify the
subprogram name for MODULE NAME.
. SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER
Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed for each step.

f) I10 module printing

The I/O module data is printed.
9) Message printing
The message data is printed.

\DRTR\SRMPLE - --I

I MESSRGE PRINT I

RDDRESS RRNGE
STRRT ADDRESS
tND ADDRESS rn

18 I FSC I END

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu

- 105 -
 4. OPERATION

i) Option (message printing)

The range of messages to be printed is specified.

h) Cross-reference list printing

A cross-reference list is printed

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu

i) Option
CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE
Check multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of same number functional
instruction (ex. timer, counter).
APPOINT ADDRESS
Specify the range of printing address. It can be specified as below.

Table 453.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification

Example of
Address specification mode Address to be output
keying in I
ALL ALL I All addresses
Initial letter of an address Y IAll addresses having a specified initial letter

Bit address Rl .O I Specified bit addresses only

Byte address x10 Specified byte addresses

(including bit addresses)

Address range FlO.O-F12.7 All addresses in a specified range

X2.3-END All addresses after a specified address

(Note 1)

(Note 1) When an address specification is made, addresses are output in the sequence: X, Y,
F, G. R, A, C, K, D, T, variable address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all
subsequent addresses are output.

-106-
 4. OPERATION

APPOINT COMMENT
Specify the kind of comment data
RELAY Print Relay comment.
COIL Print Coil comment.

ii) Bit address map

The bit address map is printed.

.\DAlA\SRMPLE

I BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT I

OUTPUT RDDRESS
RPPDINT RDDRESS

FIB I FSC FND

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu

iii) Option (Bit address map)

Output address
ALL All available addresses are printed.
(Including Not used addresses.)
USED The addresses which are used in a sequence program are printed.
. Address specifications
Specify the range of outputting addresses. For details, refer Fig. 4.5.3.3 (f) in
h) Cross Reference.

-107-
 4. OPERATION

(1) Printout example by F2[SETUP] (print menu)

<graphical mode printout > <ASCII mode printout >

4 Initial step I Sl f Initial step

Pl : Pl

PlOO 4 Transition + PlOO 4 Transition

+ (
c-L1 Label c-L1 Label
0 s210 * s210
: PlOl
f- Divergence of selective e Divergence of selective
P160 sequence + P150 + P160 sequence
c- Divergence of t-- Divergence of
I simultaneous simultaneous
0 S211 0 S215 0 S217 sequence l s211 ; S215 S217 sequence
: P151 : P161 : P165
-Convergence of f-Convergence of
simultaneous + P152 + P162 simultaneous
sequence sequence

Step * s212 ; S216 4 Step

: P153 : P163

+ P154 + 164
- Convergence of selective 4- Convergence of selective
sequence sequence
Block step El* SlOOO 4 Block step
: P2000

+ P102

Jump ->Ll 4 Jump

(2) Printout example by SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]

-z Not print sub program number > < Print sub program number >
l-

I AlSl Pl - Sub program number

0
PlOO
c-L1
5210
1 PlOO
+=-Ll
l--J s210
i-f P160

/j+i P160

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (l/2)

- 109-
 4. OPERATION

(3) Printout example of more than one page.

Size of one page

I

q
r-l-l

ttd
Cl Cl cl

tttll 22 element
El cl cl cl cl (28 element)

tttt
Cl cl cl cl

0 cl
14 element

0 Note) The maximun element count for printing

without sub-program number is given in
t parentheses.

(l/3)
I

q
r-
Link number

7G-l
cl cl cl
(33) < - Number of a sub program
t t p=>: <- L> 5=>-,

cl Cl 0 Cl cl

ttt t
vl v2 v3 Cl
4= > J
(23)
VI v2 v3
0 Cl 0

= >4 L
tt
cl cl

J
0

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (I) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2)

-llO-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.3.4 Print format-l: SETUP menu

Specify printer forms and a print format as described below.

PtlPER SIZE / LADDER PRINT

15 INCH/ RSCII
15 INCH/ GRRPHIC

Fig. 4.5.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen

[Operation ]
0 Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.
@I The SETUP menu screen appears.
@I Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g., forms size/ladder diagram print format) with the
< t > or < 1 > key.
@I Select the item by pressing the < Enter > key.
6) Position the cursor to the desired item (e.g., 10 INCHIASCII) with the < 7 >, < 1 >,
< c >, or -z -+ 7 key, then make the selection by pressing the < Enter 7 key.
@ If FlO [END] is selected after forms selection, the screen display returns to the output item
selection screen.

(1) Forms size/ladder diagram print format

Specify a forms size. In addition, specify whether to print the ladder diagram in character
format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).
The currently specified output format is indicated by *.

-lll-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.3.5 Print format-2

(AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/message file)

Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially available text editor --
5

that the output format shown in each of the following frames can be changed.

-AMROFTRP. DAT -PR201-10 . INF

[Diagram output ]b + PR201-15 . INF
1. Change the paper
PR201-A4 INF
selection name
PRlO-A INF
2. Set the top margin
PRl5A INF
3. Set the net interval
PRA4-A : INF
4. Set the printer model and
ESC-P-10 INF
paper
ESC-P-15 . INF
ESCPl O-A. INF
ESCPIS-A. INF
-CROSSINF. DAT
-FANUC-10. INF
--f (Setting the cross-reference
list output format)
5. Set the line spacing
8. Set the output format 6. Set the left margin
guidance information
9. Set the output information
10. Specify the output format
11. Set the read/write coil
guidance information
12. Specify the linefeed
13. Specify the page break

-(Message file)

--) 7. Set the title 01 printout

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.

-112-
 4. OPERATION

(1) Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format
selection.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

AMROFTRP.DAT #l O-A = 1O-inch/ASCII Arbitrary character string consisting of

#l O-G = 1O-inch/graphic up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size)
#15-A = 15inch/ASCII characters
#15-G = 15_inch/graphic
#A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII
#A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

(Note) #A4L-A= and #A4L-G =are unavailable in the output to VPlOOO.

(2) Settlng the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

AMROFTRP.DAT TOPMGL = 0 Decimal number

TOPMG = 0
t (for each form)

(3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout
can be changed in the manner shown below.

NO0003 NO0003
C C
II II
YO.7 YO.0
00001 l00006 00001 *00006
NO0004
0 NO0004
HHF D
YO.7 YO 1
00001 YO.0 YO.7 YO.1
NO0005
E
HHbl)L,, NO0005
+00006 00001

YO.1 YO.7
00001
YO.2
+00008
E
-lHHIL-ilF
YO.0 YO.1 YO.7 YO.2
+00006 00001 *00008

When LCNTL = 4 When LCNTL = 5

-113-
 4. OPERATION

File edited Modifications Settings

AMROFTRP.DAT LCNTL = 4 Specify either 4 or 5

(Set for each sheet)
,

(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper
selection.

Name of file Point of *.INF that can be Printer name

Print paper type/print mode
to be edited change set

AMROFTRP. #l O-A PRlO_A INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

DAT : PR201_10 . INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCPlO A.INF VP1000 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII
C.-FILE = ESC_P_iO. INF VP1000 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic
FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#10-G PRlO_A .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_10 .INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCPlO A. INF VP1000 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII
C.-FILE = ESC_P_iO. INF VP1 000 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic
FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#15-A PRlS_A .INF PR201 15inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCP15 A.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
C;FILE = ESC_Pj5. INF VP1 000 15inch continuous form/graphic

#15-G PRlS_A .INF PR201 15inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCP15_A.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
C-FILE = ESC_P-15. INF VP1 000 15-inch continuous form/graphic

#A4L-A PRA4_A .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

: (Note) PR201_A4 INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

C.-FILE =

#A4L-G PRA4_A INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

: (Note) PR201_A4 .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

C.-FILE =

(Note) #A4L-A = and (#A4L-G = are unavailable in the output to VPIOOO.

- 114-
 4. OPERATION

(5) Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is
the one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

.INF LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (18) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;
LDRLPf (H) (18) (C) (T15) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tcdecimal number >) ;

(6) Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the
one specified according to the descriptions in (4).

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

.INF LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Lcdecimal number>) ;

-115-
 4. OPERATION

(7) Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram when it is output.

Vame of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

.PRTOUT. JPN. @ SYSTITLE (C) ( <any character string consisting

.PRTOUT. ENG. (- SYSTEM 8 PARAMETER -) ; of up to 60 half-size (or 30 full-size)
characters > ) ;
@ CMT.TITLE
(- SYMBOL & COMMENT -) ;

@ LAD-TITLE
(- LADDER DIAGRAM -) :

@ STEP-TITLE
(- STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM -) ;

@ IO-TITLE
(- I0 MODULE DATA -) ;

@ MSG.TITLE
(- MESSAGE DATA -) ;

@ TIT.TITLE
(- TITLE DATA -) ;

@ CRSTITLE
(- CROSS-REFERENCE -) ;

@ BKTITLE
(- BIT ADDRESS MAP -) :

(Note 1) These point of changes are in the file, ILPRTOUT. ENG.

(Note 2) Half-size katakana characters cannot be used.

(8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance lnformatlon

This item can specify characters to be output as guidance informatron to be output during
cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning
are valid as guidance information.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE = Any character string consisting of up

to 19 bytes

-116-
 4. OPERATION

(9) Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference information. If
both step and net numbers are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In
the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as cross-reference
information.

Jame of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

:ROSSINF.DAT NET-INF = When only the net number is output:

STEP-INF = NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF =0
When only the step number is output:
NET-INT =0
STEP-INF = 1
When the net and step numbers are
output in the stated sequence: *
NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF =2
When the step and net numbers are
output in the stated sequence:
NET-INT =2
STEP-INF = 1

(10) Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net
numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT FORM = Character string + %s

(Note) Only letters in lowercase are valid as %s.

-117-
 4. OPERATION

(11) Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance informatlon

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT READ = Character string consisting of up to

WRITE = 13 bytes.
READ = -1 I- -1 ! I- :
WRITE = -( )- -( / )- :

(12) Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT NL= Decimal number

(Note) In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus 1 are inserted between
addresses. (If 0 is specified as the linefeed count, no space line is inserted between
addresses.)

(13) Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines
with no semicolon al the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT FF= 0 = the page is not advanced

1 = the page is advanced

-118-
 4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

Changing the types of

#PAPER = 10-G
printout paper #PAPER = 10-G
I #IO-A = 10 inch/ASCII * #lo-A=NEC 10
LENGTHL = 11
The name is changed from LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 1:lO inch to l:NEC 10. LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 10 WIDTHL = 10
WIDTH = 10
see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.) WIDTH = 10
PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 LINESL = 83
When 1 is LINES = 55 LINES = 55
RATIOL = 213 RATIOL = 2/3
selected as RATIO = 213 RATIO = 2/3
the printout GRAMODL = 14 GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16 GRAMOD = 16
paper ANKMODL = 0 ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1 ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
Changing the upper margin LEFTWG = 0
L TOPMGL = 0 TOPMGL = 5
. TOPMG = 0 (The upper margin is set to * TOPMG = 0
. LCNTL = 4 5 characters.) LCNTC = 4
L C-FILE =PRlO_A.INF C_FILE=PRlO_A.INF
4Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP Changing the types of RF&E = PRTDAT.DMP
printout paper
e I1 O-G = 10 Inch/graphic #lo-G=EPSON 10
LENGTHL = 11 (The name is changed from * LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 2:15 inch to 2:EPSON 10. LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = IO WIDTHL = 10
WIDTH = 10
See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.) WIDTH = 10
PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCHL = 151120
PITCH = 20/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 LINESL = 83
LINES = 55 LINES = 55
When 2 is RATIOL = 213 RATIOL = 2/3
RATIO = 213 RATIO = 213
selected as . GRAMODL = 14 GRAMODL = 14
the printout GRAMOD = 16 GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 0 ANKMODL = 0
paper ANKMOD = 1 ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0 LEFTWG = 0
. TOPMGL = 0 TOPMGL = 0
* TOPMG = 0 TOPMG = 0
* LCNTL = 4
Changing the type of printer LCNTL = 4
. C-FILE = PR201_10.INF C-FILE = ESCPlO_A.INF
$Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP
(The printer is changed to * OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP
EPSON VP1000 and the paper
+#15-A=151nch/ASCIl #15-A = 15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL = 11
is changed to lo-inch forms.) LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 15 WIDTHL = 15
WIDTH = 15 WIDTH = 15
PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/120 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 LINESL = 83
LINES = 55 LINES = 55
When 3 is RATIOL = 2/3 RATIOL = 2/3
RATIO = 213 RATIO = 213
selected as
GRAMODL = 16 GRAMODL = 16
the printout GRAMOD = 16 GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 1 ANKMODL = 1
paper ANKMOD = 1
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0 LEFTWG = 0
. TOPMGL = 0 Changing the spacing between TOPMGL = 0
* TOPMG = 0 the LADDER nets _ TOPMG = 0
+ LCNTL = 4 * LCNTL = 5
+ C FILE = PR15 A.INF [The net spacing for the C-FILE = PR 15_A.INF
O-FILE = PRT6AT.DMP LADDER diagram is widened.) yE&l;E = PRTDAT.DMP
&ND
+ #15-G = 15 Inch II #15-G = 15 Inch

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modrfied.

-119-

..
 4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in file PR201_10.INF)

PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF
FORMF
CPI
CANCEL
LDRCPI
* LPI (H)(W(C)(T20);
* LDRLPI (H)(W(C)(T15);
* LMARGIN (H)(W(C)(LOOO);
RMARGIN (H)(W(C)(/O7W
LDRCHAR (H)(W(C) (50014);
JPNSET (H)(W(C)(K);
JPNRESET (H)(W(C)(H);
I
.
.
.

Setting the spacing Setting the left margin

between lines (Left margin is set to 5
(Line spacing is set to 25.) characters.)
I 1
I

PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF I~~I~~j"A):
FORMF .
CANCEL U-W$
CPI (H) (1B) (C) (H) ;
LDRCPI (H)(W(C) (Q);
LPI (H)(W(C)(T25);
LDRLPI (H)(W(C)(T15);
LMARGIN .
(H)(W(C)(LOO5) ,
RMARGIN .
(H)(W(C)(/O7B)
LDRCHAR (H) (1B) (C) (JO014 i;
JPNSET (H)(W(C)(Q
JPNRESET (H)(W(C)(H);
3

(Note) An astensk (*) indtcates data which can be modified.

- 120-
 4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file
:
GUIDE=STEP No./NET No.
NET-INF=2
STEP-INF=l
FROM=S%s/N%s
READ=-1 I- -I/I- :
WRITE=-()- -(/I- :
NL=l
FF=O
;

0 Sample cross reference output

[A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE]
l l l Cross reference *** PAGE 1
STEP NO./NET No.
Address Symbol Comment
x0.0
-II----#- : S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017
S00088/N00020 SOOO94/NOOO2
x0.1
--it-# : S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017
S00077/N00029

YO.0 Double writing

--O--CD-: S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098

RO.0
--It--+- : S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010
S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017
S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035
--@- + : SOOOO2/N00001

- 121-
 4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file
:
GUIDE=Step number
NET-INF=O
STEP-INF=l
FROM=S%s
READ=read
WRITEwrite
NL=O
FF=O
;

0 Sample cross reference output

(A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE]
*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1
Step number
Address Symbol Comment
x0.0
Read : 500045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094
x0.1
Read : SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077
YO.0 Double writing
Write : SO0045 SO0128 SO0256
RO.0
Read : SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045
so0047 so0074 so0079
Write : soooo2

- 122-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.3.6 Changing the printer specification

Upon the completion of installation, the default printer is set to EPSON VPlOOO.

(1) Changing the printer specification lo NEC PR201

To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer, change the setting file by means of the procedure
described below. (In the following example, the floppy disk drive is drive A, FAPT LADDER is
installed under the C: \ FLADDER directory, and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.)

[Operation]
OCopy the AMROFTRP.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of Volume 5 of the FAPT
LADDER-II system floppy disks to the FAPT LADDER-II install directory.

Example: C: \ CD FLADDER < Enter >

C: \ FLADDER > COPY A: \ APPENDIX \ AMROFTRP.PR C: < Enter >

@I Delete the AMROPTRP.DAT file from the FAPT LADDER-II install directory.

Example: C: \ FLADDER > DEL AMROPTRP.DAT c Enter >

0 Change the name of the AMROFTRP.PR file to AMROPTRP.DAT.

Example: C: \ FLADDER > RENAME AMROFTRP.PR AMROPTRP.DAT < Enter >

Note) To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer, perform steps @ through 0, replacing
AMROFTRP.PR with AMROFTRP.ESC.

(2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printer

For details, see Section 453.5 (4).

Note) FANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with RS-232-C cable.

Please set the communication mode from DOS prompt before starting FAPT LADDER-II by
the following command.
(Example) When connected to a serial port COMl.
C:/ > MODE COM1:4800,N,8.2 < Enter >

-123-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.4 Compilation

During compilatron, an edited source program is translated into an object file executable by the
PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot be transferred to the ROM writers (PMC writer or FA writer) or
RAM for the PMC. Compilation can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and
condensed mode. (except PMC-PAB.)

6
Source
program
I ----) Transferred
and PMC
to the ROM writers

l Condensed mode

A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. When a ladder with the same number
of steps is compiled in condensed mode, the size of the created object file is smaller than that
created rn normal mode. As a result, condensed mode has the advantages listed below:

0 A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode Condensed mode

Ladder Ladder
Object file
t
C C
language language

8 Time required for compilation is reduced.

Q Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the PMC is reduced.

@ A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.

- 124-
 4. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described below.

<iI Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when instructions, symbols,
comments, and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated by compilation in
condensed mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function. In
this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between the ladder area and
C language area.

ROM format file Ladder

& .

.,. .:. ,......

. ..
Overlap (A C language program
map change is required.)
C
language

b, A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode cannot be compared with
a ROM format file generated by compilation in normal mode.

l Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, the source program, subdivided into subprograms, is converted
to a single ROM file. Within the ROM file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of
subprogram numbers. The order in which subprograms are displayed on the edit screen of the
built-in programmer function of the PMCRB4 or PMC-RC4 may be changed after the source
program has been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled, compiled, and downloaded.

4.5.4.1 Start and terminate

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.

@ The compile screen appears.

Compile PMC-RB4 [C:~CFLADDERY 1

Source program name

Output to ROM format file

SYMBOL 6 COMMENT [F6] YES
NET COMMENT (F7] POINTERS ONLY

EXEC 2 3 5 DOS OEND

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen

-125-
 4. OPERATION

l General Flow of Operation for compiling

I Offline menu I

I Offline menu I

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(2) Compile

(a) Normal mode

With PMCPA3, compile processing is always performed in condense mode.

[Operation] 6 Select Fl [EXEC].

0 Compile processing is performed in normal mode.
(b) Condense mode

[Operation] 0 Select F8 [CONDNS].

0 Compile processing is performed in condense mode.

(3) Displaying the results of compile processing

Pressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processing displays a memory map for the
object file.
The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3 [ERROR] on the compile
screen, regardless of whether an error or warning has been output. Moreover, the results of
compile processing are output lo a text-format file, as described below.

C:YDATAYSAMPLE 1
tttC# PASS1 ##tilt t Output the compile result in two passes.
MESSAGE
SYMBOL
LEVELl.NLA
Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. (00111net)tNet No.
LEVELZ.#LA in each
Pl.#LA subprogram.
PZ.#LA
There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.
#Wt## PASS2 #tl#t

Compile completed Error count =00002 Warning count =OOOOO

Fig. 4.5.4.1. (c) Compile result

PASSl: Convert to object

PASS2: Syntax check

- 126-
 4. OPERATION

If many errors have occurred, those errors can be easily identified by viewing the relevant file
wtth the text editor or by printing out the file.
The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function. (See Section 4.5.9.)

Example: When the program shown below is compiled, the following files are output lo the
C:VDATA directory:
Execution result file SAMPLE.ERR
Map file SAMPLE.MAP

Compile PMC-RB4 [C:yFLADDERSr' ]

Source program name :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

.. '.:j:..
.." ... Compile Rormal End ,.;
5.,.',::.':,,.:
;,:.:.
'.. ..::_':'::'.:$,:
.:il':.",:'.'
::::I::'
:,;:.:<::y::jj
qij!::,:;
.j:
:,..,.. .:.(.,,:,

Compile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

EXEC 2HAP 3ERROR 5 OEND

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen

(4) DOS command

You can call MS-DOS shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing F9 (DOS) key.
If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at MS-DOS command line.

vA:\>EXITl

(5) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END] or press the < Esc > key.

@I The screen drsplay returns to the main menu screen.

- 127-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.4.2 Compile options

These options initial value can be changed at the Program option set-up.
(Refer to 4.5.7 Program option set-up.)

(1) F6 [SYMBOL]
Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data to ROM format file.
However.the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MD1 (7bytes or more symbols) and
the coil comments assigned to them never output to ROM format file.

l YES: (Default setting)

The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil
comments assigned to them are output to object file.
They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

0 "NO" :

No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file.

Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI.

(2) F7 [NETCMT]
If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether Net comment pointer
(Note2) is output to object file or not.

0 POINTERS ONLY : (Default setting)

To edit the ladder program by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT
LADDER, select this setting.
However, ladder size gets larger because Net comment pointer is output to object file.

0 "NO" :

Any Net comment pointer is not output to object file. In this case, ladder size in the ROM
format file is saved.
However, decompile the object file makes its net comment data information lost.

Note 1) Net comment has its own character information only in a source program on the
personal computer.
Compiled ROM format file does not include any net comment characters.
Only Net comment pointer( = information of net comment position.) can be
output to ROM format file as an functional instruction NOP.
This Net comment pointer helps to restore net comment date at decompiling the
ROM format file that is edited on CNC built-in editor and uploaded to FAPT
LADDER.

-128-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.4.3 Password set function

This function is supported only in the FS15B16/18/21 -B.

It enables a password to be added during compilation.
The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the
CRT/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Setting program
options.)

(1) Password types

There are two password types.
Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

We Use

Password (R) Password to allow display on the CNC

Password (RAN) Password to allow display and editing on the CNC

I .

(2) Password setting (compile)

0 When no password + Goto@.

When password RW & R, RW or R

After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify
whether to use a password.

Do you enter password? (Y/N)

J

To set a password, press l-lY + If password RW & R or R go to 0.

I
If password RW go to 8.
-
If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N +Goto@.
l-l

- 129-
 4. OPERATION

0 The password (R) set screen appears.

Enter password (R)

@ Enter a password.
. A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distrnguished from each other. (If a lowercase
letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
. It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *, #, and @).
Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.
In such a case, use another character string.
An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a
password is not specified. + If password = RW&R go to @.
If password = R go to @.
. When < Esc > is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued.
+ GotoO.

@I The password configuration screen appears.

Verification (R) 1

0 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your
password was entered correctly.
. When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted.
When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
When < Esc > is pressed, an attempt to specily a password is discontinued.
+ GotoO.
If password = R is specified. --* Go to @.

@ The password (RW) set screen appears.

Enter password (R/W)

01 Enter a password (RW).

A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. (If a lowercase
letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as l, #. and @).
. Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.
In such a case, rrse another character string.

- 130-
 4. OPERATION

An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

If the -z Enter > key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a
password is not specified. + Goto@.
. When c Esc > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.
-+ Go to 0.

@ The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

(9 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your
password was entered correctly.
When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted.
When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
. When c Esc > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.
+ Go to 0.

@l Compilation begins.

4.5.5 Decompilation

During decomprlation, a ROM format lile is translated into a source program that can be edited or
printed out.
Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object file data. Data in the object file
cannot be edited or printed out. Such data must be decompiled before it can be edited or printed
out.

(Note) To decompile a password-protected object file, it is necessary to enter a password

(See Section 4.5.4.)

- 131-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.5.1 Operation

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.

@ The decompile screen appears.

Decompile PMC-RB4 [C:\FLADDER\ 1

Source program name :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Output to Source Program

SYMBOL h COMMENT
Merge [F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

EXEC 2 3 MERGE 5SYMBOL6 OEND

Fig. 4.551 (a) Decompile Menu Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation]
0 Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

Q Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed.

-132-
 4. OPERATION

(3) Decompiling

Upon the completion of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key can display the memory map of
the object file.
The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3 [ERROR] key on the decompile
screen, regardless of whether an error or warning has occurred.

If many errors have occurred, the error file can be viewed or printed using a text editor.
The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utility function (see Section 4.5.9).

(Example) When the program shown below is decompiled :

Result file SAMPLE.ERR and map file SAMPLE.MAP are output to directory C: \ DATA.

Decompile PMC-RB4

Source program name :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

. Decompile normal en8

Decompile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

EXEC MAP 3ERROR MERGE SSYMBOL OEND

P
Fig. 4.5.5.1 (b) Decompile end Screen

(4) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.5.2 Decompile option

(1) Merge

In case the existent file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent
source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of object file.
In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with the SymboVCommnet in source
program by specifying the undermentioned function-key.

-133-
 4. OPERATION

Decompile PMC-RB4 [C:\FLADDER\ ]

Source program name : c: \DATA\SAMPLE

Output to source program

SYMBOL h COMMENT
Merge [F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition (FS] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

3 MERGE 5SYMBOL6 OEND

P

Fig. 4.5.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen

(a) F4 [MERGE]
This specification decides whether to merge the symbolicomment by NO or YES

1) "NO" :
The existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the
contents of object file.
There is no display of F5(SYNBOL] in this condition.

2) YES : (Default setting)

The symbolkommnet in source program is merged with that in object file. As for the other
data except symbolicomment, object file is effective.
Just after this specification, FS(SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol
definition is effective, either in source program or in object file, when they are in conflict.

(b) F5 [SYMBOL]
F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when YES is specified for F4(MERGE].
This specification decides which symbol definition in either source program or object file is
effective when they are in conflict.

1) SOURCE DATA
The symbol definrtton rn source program is effective.

2) MEMORY CARD DATA : (Default setting)

The symbol definition in object file is effective.

- 134-
 4. OPERATION

(c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

- Object file
- Symbol/Comment data
*c- ADDRESS SYHBOL(Cbyte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

- Source program
- Symbol/Comment data
t ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

-+(i) The result of "MERGE = NO"

Source program
x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

*(ii) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD
DATA".
Source program
x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

+(iii) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA".

..
Source program
x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

-135-
 4. OPERATION

4.553 Password

To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password.

Set password type Password type to be entered

Both password (R) and (RAN) Password (R/W)

I
Password (R/w) I Password (R/W)

Password (R)

@ After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears.

Enter password (R) Note) If an R/W password has been set

up, password (R/W) is
displayed.

0 When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing
discontinues.
(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)
When -z Esc > is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

-136-
 4. OPERATION

455.4 Outputting to split files

When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they are split into units of
subprograms and output to different files. For details, see Section 3.4.2.

Object file

PO0 1.#LA
Subprogram Pl
(Ladder)

POO2.#SS
Subprogram P2
(Step Sequence)

P003.#LA
Subprogram P3
(Ladder)

The END instruction is not included in

the source program.
The instruction is automatically added
when the program is compiled.

-137-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.6 Input/Output

There are three types of inputioulput operations, as described below.

1) ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).

2) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.
3) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette
Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

[Operation]
0 Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS-232-C
cable. (See Appendix 8.)
@I Start FAPT LADDER.
0 Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
@I The input/output menu appears.

Table 4.56 Baud Rate Setting

Input/output destination Baud rate setting (bps)

ROM writers 4800

(PMC WRITER, FA WRITER)

FANUC Series 1618/20 (PMC-R series) 48OOl9600

FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB)
FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-OC)
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMC-PAlIPA3)

4.5.6.1 I/O port setting

FAPT LADDER sets up ports according to the values in the following data files.

1) IBM PC/AT version : FLIO - AT.DAT

These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

-138-
 4. OPERATION

2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT

(effective data section only)

DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET

PMC-WRITER =COMl 48. N. 8.2

FA-WRITER =COMl :48.N,8.2
PMC-L =COMl .48, N. 8.2
PMC-M =COMl r48.N.8.2
PMC-M (TT) =COMl : 48. N. 8. 2
PMC-M (AXIS) =COMl : 48, N. 8, 2
PMC-MMC =COMl ~48.N.8.2
PMC-MMC (AXIS) =COMl r48.N.8.2
PMC-N =COMl y96.N.8.2
PMC-P =COMl 48. N. 8. 2
PMC-OA =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-M (I/O) =COMl : 48. N. 8. 2
PMC-M (l/O. TT) =COMi .48, N. 8.2
PMC-M (I/O. AXIS) =COMl .48. N. 8. 2
PMC-N (I/O) =COMl : 96. N. 8, 2
PMC-RB =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RC =COMi 96. N. 8. 2
PMC-RAl =COMl 96. N. 8. 2
PMC-RA2 =COMl 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RBP =COMl 96. N. 8. 2
PMC-RA3 =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RB3 =COMl : 96. N, 8. 2
PMC-RC3 =COMl : 96, N. 0. 2
PMC-PA1 =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-PA3 =COMl : 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-QC =COMl : 96. N. 8. 2
PMC-NB =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-R04 =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RC4 =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RB4 (STEP~SEO) =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2
PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEC)) =COMl : 96. N. 8. 2

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign ( =) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each MODE
command. Only the first parameter (port number) and second parameter (baud rate) can be
changed.

- 139-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.6.2 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

ROM format data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. ROMs which can be used depend on the
PMC model, as indicated in Table 4.5.6.2. When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.

Table 4.5.6.2 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model

PMC model Usable ROM

PMC-RA3 lM-bit ROM

PMC-RB3 lM-bit ROM/ROM module B (note 1)

PMC-RC3 ROM module A, B, C, and D

(1) Read

[Operation]
Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select Fl : (READ].

Enter the name of a source program name containing read data.

Read operation is executed. During operation, the indication EXECUTING blinks.

When read operation terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

(2) Write

[Operation 1
Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select F2 : (WRITE].

Enter the name of a source program name to be written.

Writing is executed. During operation, the indication EXECUTING blinks.

When writing terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

- 140-
 4. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation]
0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select F3 : [VERIFY]

0 Enter the name of a source program name to be verified.

@ Verification is executed. During operatron, the Indication EXECUTING blinks.

0 When verification terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

(4) Blank check

[Operation]
0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select F4 : [BLANK] (blank check).

6 Blank checking is executed. During operation, the indication EXECUTING blinks.

@I When blank checking terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]
@ Select FlO : [END].

Q The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) When writing 1Mbit ROM for PMC-RB3 with FA writer, ID ERROR will be
displayed on FA writer. But writing terminates normally.
(Note 2) PMC except PMCRA3, RB3, RC3 not transfer data to and from EPROM.

-141-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC

(1) Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PA3/NB/NB2KJC

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.

FS16/18/15B
FAPT LADDER 7 -Power Mate-D/F/H, -
1 F-D Mate mini
9600 bps14800 bps

9600 bps14800 bps

Upload

9600 bps14800 bps

Comparison

Baud rate settinq for FS16/18/158, Power Mate-D/F/H, and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download

[Operation]
(i> Select F3 : [PMC] on the VO menu screen.

Q, Select Fl : [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen to display the source program
name.

*c3) Press the < SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

t(4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], II/O), [HOST], and [EXEC) in this order.

Press the < Enter > key.

Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication EXECUTING blinks.

When downloadlng terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

(2) Upload
If the PMC-RC3RC4QCNBNB2 used, language data (C language) other than Ladder
programs can be used. When uploading or comparison is executed from one of these PMCs,
one of two data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL have the
following meantngs:

LADDER Sequence program only

ALL Sequence program and language data (C language)

-142-
 4. OPERATION

Specify either data type in step 6I of the operation described below:

[Operation]
0 Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display the source program name.

*@ Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*G?JPress the CNC soft keys [PMC]. [l/O]. [HOST], and (EXEC] in this order.

0 Press the <Enter> key.

8 Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

(?I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication EXECUTING blinks.

@I When uploading terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output. ,

(3) Comparison

[Operation]
0 Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

0 Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen to display the source
program name.

*O Press the c SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

$0 Press the CNC soft keys (PMC], [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order

@ Press the <Enter > key

6) Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication EXECtJTlNG blinks.

0 When comparison terminates normally, the indication NORMAL END is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END]

@ The screen dtsplay returns to the main menu screen

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation
on the CNC.

-143-
 4. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D

The NC of the Power Mate-D/H have the CRTiMDl screen and the DPL/MDI screen. The NC
of the Power Mate-F has only the DPLIMDI screen. When the CRT/MD1 screen is used, the
procedures for data input/output are the same as those with the PMC-R Series ((1) to (4)
above). When the DPLIMDI screen is used, the procedures for data input/output are different
from those with the PMC-R Series.
When the DPLIMDI screen is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as
described below:

(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPL/MDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen
(b) Press the <READ > or <WRITE > key on the DPLIMDI screen.
(c) Follow procedures (1) to (4) described above on the personal computer.

4.5.6.4 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory

card

A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a memory card format file, and
output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer. The PMC
program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory card in
the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the procedure, programs can be transferred
from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

- 144-
 4. OPERATION

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]
Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program.

Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output) from it.

Select F5 : [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

Fl KEY FR WRITER

F2 KEY PWC WRITER

F3 KEY PHC

F-5 KEY Handy Clle

FS KEY Henorv Card

F6 KEY BFICKUP

F18 KEY END

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (a) InputIOutout Menu

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer - > memory card)).

l/O MQBRY CARD)

Fl KEY WRITE ( PROCRAMER J Memry Card )

F:! KEY READ ( PROCWR ( Memory Card )
FIO KEY : END

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

- 145-
 4. OPERATION

Convert the file from source program to memory card format.

Specify the following items for execution.
l Name of the source program
Display the source program name.
l Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the
CNC) to be created by conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

WHITE ( Programx ) Merry Card 1

Source program name : C : YDATAWMFLE

Memory Card FILE NAME : D: YSAMPLE. #BF

(Specify the MEMORYCARD drive)

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (c) Input/Output (to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

-146-
 4. OPERATION

The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card output in step @ into
the memory card interface in the CNC and read programs on the memory card.
l Using the I/O function of the PMC
Specify M-CARD, READ, and the desired filename or file number at DEVICE,
FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft key
[EXEC]. Sequence programs are read from the memory card file created in step 0.

PMC l/O screen

-~~
PMC l/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M-CARD
::FtJNC:T~I.Oti
= READ
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
( #NAME )

[ EXEC I[CANCELI[WRITE I[ READ I[COMPARI

l Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power-on time

Each CNC can read the sequence program from the memory card by using the BOOT
SYSTEM at power-on time.
Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation.

-147-
 4. OPERATION

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface in the CNC.
When the memory card is inserted in a memory card interface in the personal computer, the
PMC programs on the memory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files.

[Operation J
0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,
FUNCTION, LADDER, and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, respectively, then press soft
key (EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

PMC l/O screen

PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M-CARD
FHNG:TIiON: = WRITE
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
( #NAME 1

/ [ EXEC I[CANCELl[WRITE I[ READ I[COMPARI

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

@ Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

0 Select [IO] (input!output) from the main menu.

@ Select F5 : [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu, (See Fig. 4.5.6.4 (a).)

61 Select [READ] (read (programmer <- memory card)). (See Fig. 4.5.6.4 (b).)

@ Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 0 from memory card format
to source program format by specifying the following items and running the utility.
l Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory
card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.
l Name of the source program
Display the source program name.

- 148-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.6.5 Handy file + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output to a
3.5 floppy disk (DOS format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a
Handy File interface connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]
Compile a source program.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu. (See Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a).)

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> Handy File)).

FI KE\ WRITE ( Programer ) Handy File)

F? KEY READ ( Programner Handy F i I e)

Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen

 4. OPERATION

@ Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying the following items and
running the utility.
l Name of the source program
Display the source program.
l Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy
File) to be generated by conversion, and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output;
5 floppy disk cannot be used.

WRITE ( Programer > Handy File )

Source program neme : C: YDATAYSAMFLE

Handy File File name : C:YSAMPLE. #SF

(Specify the floppy dish drive)

Fig. 4.5.6.5 (b) Input/Output (to FDCAS) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

8 Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk generated in step @ into
the Handy File.

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation]
0 Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program to a 3.5 floppy disk (DOS
format).

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

@ Select [I.01 (input/output) from the main unit.

(31 Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.

@I Select [READ] (read (programmer < -Handy File)). (See Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a).)

- 151-
 4. OPERATION

Convert the PMC program on a 3.5 floppy disk (Handy File format) generated in step 0 to
source program by specifying the following items and running the utility.
l Name of the Handy Frle format file
Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5 floppy disk drive where the
floppy disk is inserted.
l Name of the source program
Display the source program.

READ I Prograr I~ Handy File 1

Handy File File naw : C : YSAMPLE. #SF
(Specify the floppy disk drive)

Source program naiw : C :YDATAYSAMPLE

Fig. 4.5.6.5 (c) InputlOutput (from FDCAS) Screen

Decompile the source program file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able
to be edited on the personal computer.

-152-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.6.6 Backup of user program

This backup function can back up the source program, which the system uses, to another source
program and can restore the backup source program.
Please use this function when you back up the source program under editing or under debugging.

tl KEY BACKUP

t2 KtV txSlORl

FlB KEY END

Fig. 4.5.6.6 (a) Backup Menu Screen

(1) Backup

[Operation]
0 Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

0 Select Fl : [BACKUP] from the backup menu.

0 Enter a backup program name, and press (EXEC].

BRCKUP (SOURCE PROGRRH -> RRCKUP PROGRAM)

BRCKUP PROGRRW NW

mrmm3m3amm3mnm

Fig. 4.5.6.6 (b) Backup Screen

-153-
 4. OPERATION

@ When backup terminates normaly, the NORMAL END message is displayed.

(2) Restoring

[Operation]
@I Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

(3 Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu.

0 Enter a backup program name, and press (EXEC].

RLSIORC (SOURCE PROGRRH (- BRCKUP PROGRRH)

BRCKUP YROGRRH NRWF

Fig. 4.5.6.6 (c) Restoring Screen

@I When restoring terminates normaly, the NORMAL END message is displayed.

-154-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.7 Setting program options

This function enables the setting of options for each function.

Specified data is stored for each source program.

[Operation j
0 Using the < J > or c T > key, position the cursor to the function for which options are to
be set.

@ On the setting screen for each function, select an item by positioning the cursor with the
< l > or < T > key, then change the setting with the et> or < -_$> key.

.\DRTA\SFlnPLE

Fig. 4.57

457.1 Compile

The user can set the compile function options as described below. These options, when set, are
used as the initial values of the compile options for the off-line function, or are used for compile
processing performed with the on-line functions.

For details of each option, see Section 4.5.4.

(1) Condense
This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for compile processing.

(2) Symbol
This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to an object file.

(3) Net comment

This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object file.

-155-
 4. OPERATION

(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compile time.

VW Does not display the dialog box. (Password setting is disabled.)

[RW&R] : Displays the password (RN) setting dialog box as well as the
password (R) setting dialog box.

Fw Displays only the password (RAN) setting dialog box.

[RI Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Fig. 4.5.7.1

-156-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.7.2 Decompile

The user can set the decompile function options as described below. These options, when set, are
used as the initial values of the off-line function decompile options, or are used for the decompile
processing performed with the on-line functions.
For details of each option, see Section 4.5.5.

(1) Symbol merge

This option specifies whether to merge source program data and object file symbol/comment
data at decompile time.

PJOI . Does not merge symbol and comment data.

[SOURCE] T Gives prionty to the source data when duplicate addresses exist in the
source program and the symbol data of the object file.

[MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data when duplicate addresses exist in
the source program and the symbol data of the object file. ,

IDecomDilel

~~INO/SOURCE~I

Fig. 4.5.7.2

-157-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.7.3 Modifying program option initial values (OPTION.CNF)

When a new program is to be created, the initial value of each option can be modified by means of
the procedure described below.

[Operation]
Using the text editor, open the OPTION.CNF file under the directory where FAPT LADDER-
II is installed.

Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial value modification (that is. a line
starting with #).

Example: #32;(RA3) for PMC-RA3

#4l;(Rl34_STEP) for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

Note) A section having a line beginning with a semicolon (:) contains legend data. Any
attempt to modify such a section is ignored.

0 Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initial value modification (that is,
a line starting with ).

0 Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to be modified.

Table 4.5.7.3

Subsection Option Setting and function

COMPILE condense 0: Performs compile processing in normal

mode.
1: Performs compile processing in condense
mode.

symbol 0: Does not output symbol/comment data to

(Symbol/comment) the object file.
1: Outputs symbol/comment data to the object
file.

netcmt 0: Does not output net comment data to the

(Net comment) object file.
1: Outputs net comment data to the object file.

password 0: Does not set a password.

1: Sets a password (R/W) and password (R).
2: Sets a password (RMT).
3: Sets a password (R).

DECOMPILE symbol-merge 0: Does not perform merge processing.

1: Performs merge processing with priority
given to source program data.
2: Performs merge processing with priority
given to object file data.

Note) Never attempt to modify the values of options that are not listed in the above table.
Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

-158-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8 Mnemonic editing

4.5.8.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation]
0 Select [MNEEDTJ (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

Q The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1 (a)).

FI KEY : SOURCE PROGRAM-) WEUINIC FILE

F2 KEY : MNEWNIC FILE ) SOURCE PROGRAM

F3 KEY : EXECUTEUSER BATCH FILE

FIO KEY : END

Fig. 4.5.8.1(a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

0 Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

-159-
 4. OPERATION

@I The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1(b)).

I) SOURCEPROGRAMNM(E

2) WEMUNIC FILE NAME

31 CUNVfRTADI)TA
KIND SELECTIUN
(0 : 4 : LADDER
{ ; : yqgl PARAMETER , 5 : I/U MODULE
. 6 MESSECE
(3 SwBULLCMMENr

4) MODE : FUR P-C

Fig. 4.5.8.1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen

0 Specify the following items:

l Source program name
Display the name of the source program to be converted.
l Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of Ihe mnemonic file to which a source program is converted. Up to
40 characters can be specified.
l Data conversion selection
Specify data files subject to conversion. All data files can be specified or specific data
files can be selected.
l Mode (setting item selection)
Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using the -z t > and
< + > keys.

- 160-
 4. OPERATION

:OR - P-G P-G output format data is converted.

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2).

lapanese Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.

anguage Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
:omment (Note) format (Note 3).

IJLL - OPTIONS Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.
Data including address symbols and comments, and function instruction
names treated as comments is converted.
Data including all instruction sections, operand sections, and comment
sections is converted.
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

.ABEL/ Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction
SUB-PROGRAM (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP, or another instruction) used in a sub-program is
highlighted. The step number of the converted mnemonic data does not
agree with other setting. (The function instruction section used in the sub-
program does not agree with the other setting.)
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

(Note 1) The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected
on an English mode system.
(Note 2, 3) Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input mode screen during
message editing.

@ Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

0 Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.

@ An error message is displayed if <Enter> is pressed after conversion. The mnemonic

conversion screen appears when < SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

-161-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted to a source
program that can be edited with the personal computer version of FAPT LADDER.

(Operation]
Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).

The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 458.2).

I) WEMONIC FILE NAMT

2) SOURCE PROCRAM NAME

Specify the followlng items:

l Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be
specified.
0 Source program name
Display the name of the source program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.

Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

Mnemonic file is converted to a source program

An error message is displayed if c Enter> is pressed after conversion. The source

program conversion screen appears when -z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

-162-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted to a source
program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format.

(1) Identification code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification codes that each begin with %.

ID code Description

%@A Beginning of ALL-format data

%@E End of ALL-format data
%@O to 5 Beginning of unit-format data
% only End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.

I
PMC model
Unit-format data
R series/PAS/QC/NB/NB2

Parameter %@O
Title %@l
Symbol & comment %@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)
Ladder %@3
Message %@4
l/O module % @5

Note 1) %@2, and %@2-C correspond to source format types as follows:

% @2 : FORMAT-A/B
%@2-c : FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER-II uses FORMAT-C only. This means that, as part of conversion to
a mnemonic file, conversion to %@2-C type code is performed. For conversion
to a source program, however, both type codes (%@2 and %@2-C) can be
used.

-163-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Linefeed code

Control character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is
ignored.

(3) Reserved symbols

0 cd This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.

l A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder data from a
comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are treated as a comment.
When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program, a semicolon and
a comment that follows it are not generated.
@ r:j This special character is reserved for use in ladder and l/O module data.
l A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder
data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number.
l A colon is also used in the l/O module data section to separate a channel
number from I/O module data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a
channel number.

(4) Control character

The dollar character $ is used as control character in the mnemonic file. Every dollar
character in the sentence must be described as $$I in the mnemonic file.

(a) Symbol and comment data

(f) Description of address and symbol

Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.
Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe after address data
with blank character or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter.

L R0200.0 UNIT - 3 - POWER

-164-
 4. OPERATION

@ Description of relay comment and coil comment

Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address defined in (1).
The first string between two single quotation marks after mark $1 is relay comment. And
next string between two single quotation marks is coil comment.

I $1 KEEP POWER ON KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON

Blank character or horizontal tabulation character

Mark of comment data line (only $1)

When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must be described by double
single quotation marks.

I $1 INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE

Note) Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil comment string must be
described as $I + in the mnemonic file.

(b) Ladder data

Description of net comment

The net comment data is specified by ( and ) characters.

31

Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described as $P or $p in
the mnemonic file.

(for ladder diagram printing)

-165-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter

0 PMC-PA3:RA3!Rf34!RB4 (STEP)IRBSIRBG

%@ 0
2
1
BINARY1
1 2. Counter dala type (Binary or BCD)

3 NOJ. 3. Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
4 PMC-RB41 4. PMC model (PMC-RA3/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4
81 (STEP SEQ) PMC-PAYPMC-
[EOBI RB5/PMC-RB6)

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used), specify
the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as
follows:

(3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl 1

@ PMC-RB3

%@ 0 1
2 BINARYJ. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

3 NOi Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
4 PMC-RB31 PMC model (PMC-RB3)
7 1001 Ladder execution time (100% (fixed))
%l
IEOBI

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used),
specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image
address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

-166-
 4. OPERATION

0 PMCRC3IRC4IRC4 (STEP)

se 0 1
2 BCDl 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3. Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
3 ND1
4 PMC-RC41 4. PMC model (PMCRC3/PMCRC4/PMCRC4

5 000000 (STEPSEQ))

7 1001 5. Start address of language program link control statement data

%l (0 or 800000 to SFFFFF

IEOBI (hexadecimal))
7. Ladder execution time (1 to 150%)

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used),
specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image
address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

@ PMCQC/NB/NB2

se 0 1
2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
2 BCDl
3. Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
3 NOi
4. PMC model (PMC-OC/PMC-NB/PMC-NB2)
4 PMC-QCJ
5 000000 5. Start address of language program link control statement data
(0 or 200000 to 2FFFFF
6 501
7 1001 (hexadecimal))
6. Percentage of language program execution time (1% to 99% 1
sl
7. Ladder execution time (Always
[EOBI 100%)

(Note) If YES is specified in item 3 (whether an operators panel is used), specify the
addresses of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO1

-167-
 4. OPERATION

(b) Title (common to all models)

%@ 11
'01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME 1
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME1
03 CNC 7 PMC NAME1
IO4 PMC PROGRAM NO.1
~05 EDITION NO.1
'06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.1
'07 DATE OF PROGRAMING1
'08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BYi
109 ROM WRITTEN BY1
~10 REMARKS1
I% 1
~ [EOB]

(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)

%@2-c rp Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'
I Coil Comment
Relay comment
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
$1 *$'PowER$$' 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'
R0300.0 -Control code
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP INIT- POWER ON'
PO008 OPEN-FRONT
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER'
LO100 INITIALIZE
$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'
1 no Relay comment
%
IEOBI

-168-
 4. OPERATION

Q) FULL- OPTIONS

%@3
NOOOOl:
1
SUB 71
Pl
; SP
;(SUBPRl
r- Symbol
r Relay comment
) "SUB PROG. NO.O1" 1
: [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.Ol] 1
Coil comment
N00002: RD x0.0 ;(XADRSl ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl" 4-_1
SUB 68 ; JMPBJ no Comment
LlOO ;(LABELl )1
no Relay comment
; [LABEL ~ooooi] I1
N00003: RD x0.1 ;(XADRSI ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl" 1
SUB 73 ; JMPCJ
LlOO ;(LABELl ) 1
; [LABEL ~ooool] 1
N00004: SUB 69 ; LBL 1
LlOO ;(LABELl )l
; [LABEL ~ooooi] 1
N00005: SUB 72 i- SPE 1
N00006: SUB 71 ; spl
P2 ; (SPlOOO ) "SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l
N00007: RD RO.0 ; (RADRSOO ) 1
DEC DO : (DADRSOI 1 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
N00008: SUB 72 : SPE 1
N00009: SUB 64 : END 1
81

-170-
 4. OPERATION

@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

8@3 3 I Address I Relay comment

SUBPRl SP SUBPRl ;<Pl > SUB PROG. N0.01"
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1
r Symbol - Coil comment

RD XADRSl ;<XO.O > "JIJMPB LABEL LOOl"J.

JMPB LABEL1 ;<LlOO >l
; [LABEL ~ooool] 1
RD XADRSZ ;<XO.l > "JUMPB LABEL LOol"1
JMPC LABEL1 ;<LlOO > [LABEL Looooi] 1
LABEL1 LBL ;<LlOOO >l
: [LABEL LOOOOl] 1
SPE 1
SPlOOO SP ;<P2 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l
RD RADROO ;<RO.O ' 1
DEC DADR04 ;<DO ' 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
SPE 1
END 1
01
J

(4 Message

%@ 4 1
A0 0. 0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE1
AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVA
L SIGNAL NOT ON1
A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ONJ.
%l
IEOBI

0) I/O module

%@ 5 1
x000 1 0 1 ID64AJ.
YOO8 1 0 4 OD64Bl
sl
[EOBI

- 171-
 4. OPERATION

458.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-FIB4

%@A 1
%@O 1
2 BINARY4
3 NO&
4 PMC-RB4 1
%1
%@l 1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1

-10 REMARKS 1
%1
%@2-c 1
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1
$1 'S'POWERSS' 'KEEP UNIT-~ SSPOWERS' ON'1
R0300.0 1
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'J.
PO008 OPEN-FRONT1
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1
LO100 INITIALIZE1
$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'1
% 1
%@3 1
RD RlOOl.01
OR R120.3 1
AND R1000.2 1
WRT Y2000.4 1
(*
Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters
A Net comment
which are input with personal computer can be used.
1)
RD R1OO1.O 1
AND R1000.2 1
WRT Y23.4 1
1* SP l) form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing)
RD R1O1.O 1
OR R123.4 1
AND R100.21
WRT Y200.4 1
% 1
%@4 1
AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ
AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1
% 1
%@5 1
x000 1 0 1 ID16CI
YOO8 1 0 4 OD32A1
% 1
%@E 1

-172-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a
model

When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be coded.
The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:

1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions

A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to
create a step sequence program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER
by means of mnemonic-to-source conversion.

2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions

If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence source program, only ladder
subprograms are converted to mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a
step sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic conversion, then to
mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original source program will not be replicated.

3) Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics

A program can be converted by using mnemonics, as shown below:

* PMCRC3

1
e PMCRC4

J
PMCRC4 1
(STEP SEQ)

A program for the PMC-RE34 (STEP SEC)) cannot be converted for use with the PMCRC4
(STEP SEC) are not able to use mnemonics for step sequence. The program can be
converted if a ROM file is used, however. (For details of this conversion, see the APPENDIX

3.)

- 173-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.8.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

A users own batch file generated by editing the contents of the FLMNE.BAT file with a standard
text editor can also be executed.

l Example 1

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended and text editor VZ is activated. (in this case,
VZ must be defined in the environment variable PATH beforehand.)

[Operation]
Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BAT as follows:

vz

Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).

The following message appears:

Execute FLMNE.BAT.

Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ is activated and a list of files
with the extension .HEX is displayed.

To restart FAPT LADDER, terminate VZ.

Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.

l Example 2

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended. Then, the command processor

COMMAND.COM is activated and MS-DOS commands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as
follows:

COMMAND
I

-174-
 4. OPERATION

4.5.9 Utility

Selecting (UTILTY] from the off-line menu enables the use of the utility functions. The following
functions are registered at installation:

UTILITY
Pl DOS
F2 f loadat
F3 View result
F4 Linker

Fig. 4.5.9 (a) Utility Screen

Moving to the DOS command line (starting COMMAND.COM) <Fl>: DOS

Data transfer between the P-G and personal computer (FLOADAT) c F2 > : floadat
(For details, see Section 3.4 in Appendix 3.)

Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing < F3 > : View result

Link function < F4 > : Linker

0 and 0 are detailed below.

The user can register any desired command as a utility. For an explanation of how to perform this
registration, see Section 2.1 of Appendix 2.

(1) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing (starting FLVIEW.BAT)

Upon the completion of compile or decompile processing, an execution result file and map file
are created. These files are of text format, enabling their reference using a commercially
available editor. By using this function, however, these files can be referenced even before
FAPT LADDER is terminated.

[Operation]
0) Press < F3 > on the utility screen.

8 Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. These files can now be referenced by
pressing the <Enter > key.

$P. :.er C .. :.... ..::i..l::>.

.j: ..+

The user can specify the type of files to be referenced, simply by changing the file name extension
(.err: Execution result filei.map: Map file).
 4. OPERATION

(2) Link

During linking, load modules created in the C language are linked with a ROM format file. The C
language can be used only with PMCRC3RC4RC4 (STEP SEQ)IQCINBINB2. Linking is not
required when the C language is not used.

U 1 II
ROM
format file

- gig - Transferred
andPMC
to the ROM writers

U
Load modules
fn C language

(Note 1) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer. In addition, with
this function, an object and C language load modules can be separately transferred to
and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).

l C proqram development environment for PMC-RC (IRC3IRC4IQCINB)

- Personal computer
Link control statement - FAPT LADDER
creation tool

C language source Link control source Convert

(Note 2)
Ibject file W ROM format
MCARD file) file
iC286 (compiler) FANUC distribution
I ,- library
tt
BND386 (binder)
t
BLD386 (binder)
Convert
$_ (Note 2)
OJ386 (converter ) Link _ROM format file -Object file -

.I
c with C language (MCARD file)
Intel hexadecimal _ HEX2SREC (Note l)-
load module
--
l
I-I-

-176-
 4. OPERATION

(Note l)FAPT LADDER-II does not allow Intel hexadecimal load modules to be linked. Before
link operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC Users Manual.

(Note 2)With FAPT LADDER-II, ROM format files are no longer used. This means that a ROM
format file cannot be created by compile processing alone, conversion between an
object file and ROM format file being required. A detailed description is given below.

(4 Uselng method of HEX2SREC

Clanguage load modules created in the development languages indicated above cannot be
directly linked. Perform the below operation before linking.

[Operation]
@I Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

IA:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEx2sREc input-file-name output-file-name I

8 Conversion is performed.

@I Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

@ Specify an output file name (for example, SAMPLE.SR) as the load module file name for
linking.

(Note) When the extension of an input file name is omitted, the extension .HEX is
assumed. Output is directed to a file with the same name but the extension is
changed to .SR. The specification of the following files has the same effect in
input/output:
HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR

HEXZSREC SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR

HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX

HEXZSREC SAMPLE

(b) Converting between an object file and ROM format file

With FAPT LADDER-II, a ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program.
Instead, in the case of link processing, the following extra work is required.

Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARD file) to a ROM format file

After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to an object file (MCARD file)

-177-
 4. OPERATION

[Operation]
@ Compile the source program (to create an object file).

G3 Select (I/O) from the off-line menu.

0 Press the < F9 > key on the I/O screen. Then, the l/O (ROM FILE) screen is displayed.

(Note) The 110 screen does not display information relating to the c F9 > key, but the < F9 >
key can be selected.

Before link processing, select Fl [WRITE] to convert the object file (MCARD file) to a ROM
format file. After link processing, select F2 [READ] to convert the ROM format file to an
object file (MCARD file).

Fl KEV WRITE ( Memory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F2 KEY AEFlO ( Memory Card <- ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F10 KEY END

Fig. 4.5.9 (b)

-178-
 4. OPERATION

(c) Starting link processing

[Operation]
@ Press < F4 > on the utility screen.

GZJ Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. Pressing the <Enter> key displays the
link screen.

Specify the model to be used for link processing, by changing the model file name.
The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMC models and model file
names.

PMC model Model file name

PMC-RC3 f103400. tbl (Initial value)

PMC-RC4 1104000. lbl
PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ) fl04200. tbf
PMC-QC 1103700. tbl
PMC-NB 1103800. tbl
PMC-NB2 fl04300. tbl

0 The link screen (Fig. 4.5.9 (c)) appears.

Linker

Load wdule f i Ie name A:YDATAYC-WDULE. SR

ROM forut file name : A:YDATAYSAWLE.UEX

Series Edlllan bchlne tool name

NC d WC na.e Progru no

Fig. 4.5.9 (c) Link Screen

-179-
 4. OPERATION

(Note) If an invalid model file is spectfted, the status line of the link screen does not display a
model name. In such a case, check the following:
When the newly entered file name is invalid
+ Enter a valid file name.
. When the specified model file is not installed
--* Install the model file.

(d) Linking

[Operation]
m Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. The load module file
name must conform to DOS specifications. Here the load module file name should be
specified with its extension (--------. l * *). (Specity an output program name for
HEX2SREC.)

@ Select [EXEC].

(3) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

Q The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off- Line Function

Selecttng ON-LINE FUNCTION from the off-line menu enables the use of the On- Line (selected
program) functions. For details, see Section 4.6 On-Line Function.

(Correct a part of the (4) Coversion of a ROM format file in the 3.2 Conversion from FAPT
LADDER in the APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM)

[Present]
(1) Select ]Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select F6 [l/O]. The [l/O] screen
appears.

[Correctron]
(5) Select [Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select [l/O]. The [l/O] screen
appears.

- 180-
 4. OPERATION

4.6 Online function

4.6.1 The outline of Online function

4.6.1.1 Outline

The on-line function enables the onscreen monitoring and modification of ladder programs and
signal statuses using a personal computer connected to the CNC through an RS232C cable.
The main features of the on-line function are:

l Onscreen monitoring of ladder programs

l Online editing of ladder programs

l Display and modification of PMC parameters

l Onscreen monitoring and modification of signal statuses

l Input and output of a program to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC and storing to
the PM0

l Writing to F-ROM

[Note] The on-line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported.

The on-line function can be selected from the initial menu by selecting either of the following two
options:

0 ON-LINE FUNCTION

@ ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)

The two options are outlined below:

- 181 -
 4. OPERATION

(1) On-line function outline

(a) ON-LINE FUNCTION

Select this option to load a ladder program from the PMC to a personal computer and
subsequently monilor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses.

- FAPT LADDER-II , ,---- CNCiPMC

Select ON-LINE FUNCTION.

A sequence program is loaded from

1 Sequence program (RAM) 1
the PMC (automatic). I I

Ladder monitor Sequence program (RAM)

01 7 Power ON

1 Sequence program (F-ROM) 1

On-line function I I
Diagnosis *IB, J @
. lnputioutput (Loading from or
storing to the PMC, writing to F-
ROM)
Communication (Communication
with the PMC)
File storage

-182-
 4. OPERATION

(b) ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)

Select this optron to store a program selected using [PROGRAM SELECT] on the initial
menu of the PMC and to monitor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses.
This function enables a ladder program, held by the PMC, to be loaded into a personal
computer.
This function enables the ladder monitor/online edit function to be applied to a relay
comment or net comment of the program selected by [PROGRAM SELECT].

- FAPT LADDER-II 1, CNUPMC

Select ON-LINE (SELECTED

PROGRAM).
0
r Sequence program (RAM)
A sequence program held on the
PMC is compared with the
@1 1 Power ON
sequence program specified on the
personal computer (automatic). 1 Sequence program (F-ROM) 1
< If the programs do not match >
Select one of the following
monitoring methods:
. Loading of the program from the
PMC
. Storing of the program to the
PMC
. Respecifying the program on the
personal computer
Continuing or stopping the
processing
t

Ladder monitor Sequence program (RAM)

On-line function
. Diagnosis 2@
. Input/output (Loading from or
storing to the PMC. writing to F-
ROM)
. Communication (Communication
with the PMC)

File
B

. Relay comment
. Net comment
L

- 183-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.1.2 Starting the on-line function

(1) Specifying the on-line function

To use the on-line function, select ON-LINE FUNCTION or ON-LINE (SELECTED
PROGRAM) on the initial menu screen.
The operation of the function partly depends on whether ON-LINE FUNCTION or ON-LINE
(SELECTED PROGRAM) is selected. For details of the subsequent operation, see the
description of the function to be used.

RBO(STEP SEQ) [ C:YDATRYSAWLE I

ROBE-9201-3503 Version 01.0

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and

press [ENTERI or [SPRCEI key to select.

bff-Line Function I

r On-Line Function I

On-Line (selected orogram)

I Exit
I

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (a)

(Note) Before attempting to use the on-line function, connect all cables and set up the PMC.
Before selecting the on-line function, see Section 4.6.2, Preparation.

- 184-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Selecting ON-LINE FUNCTION

If ON-LINE FUNCTION is selected, performing the following steps causes the ladder monitor
screen to appear. With lhe ladder monitor screen displayed, select a desired function either
from a pull-down menu or by pressing the corresponding function key.

[Displaying the ladder monitor screen]

Related section
Select ON-LINE FUNCTION.

J
8 Communication with the PMC is executed. . . .. . . . See Section 4.6.6,
(automatic) Communication.

&
0 A program is loaded from the PMC (automatic). . . See Section 4.6.5.1,
(This step is executed onlv when required.) Loading from the PMC.

J
The ladder monitor . . . . .. . . . . .. . .

1
subproaram screen appears (automatic).

J See Section 4.6.4.1,

Select a subproqram. . _. . . . . . . Ladder monitor.
J
The ladder monitor screen appears. .

The screens are outlined below. For details, see the corresponding sections.

-185-
 4. OPERATION

(a) Communication with the PMC

Selecting ON-LINE FUNCTION causes the online monitor screen (SET
COMMUNICATION dialog box) to appear as shown below. Communication with the PMC
starts automatrcally.

Try to connect with PllC 0000 0000

F7 FB F9 Fl@
Splist Search Symbol Seting

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (b)

(Note) If communicatron falls. click the (PARAMETER] button in the SET

COMMUNICATION dialog box. The communication parameter settings appear.
Check the settings. (See Section 4.6.6, Communication.)

- 186-
 4. OPERATION

(b) Loading from the PMC

After communication with the PMC starts normally, the SET COMMUNICATION dialog
box closes automatically and the LOAD FROM PMC dialog box is opened in its place. A
program is automatically loaded from the PMC.

Lid ftom PNC ..,

-Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (c)

(Note) When the most recently monitored program is to be used, loading from the PMC can
be skipped.

(c) Displaying the SUBPROGRAM dialog box (Ladder monitor function)

Once a program is loaded from the PMC, the SUBPROGRAM dialog box for the ladder
monitor function appears. Specify the subprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as
described below:

[Operation]
il, Posrtion the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the < t > or < 1 7 key.

8 Press the <Enter> key.

@ The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.

...
LEVECl , ,.,. :. : . j .:..,.,; :,.,: ,:.,
LEVEL2
PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Rl
PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Ll
P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK
PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2
PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

1 Ok 11 Cancel]

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (d)

- 187-
 4. OPERATION

(b) Decompiling a selected program

If ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM) is selected after a program is obtained using the
input/output function of the on-line function, but before the program is decompiled, the
following message appears:

IMemory card format file has been updated. Decompile it ? (Y/N) 1

To use the on-line function for the program obtained using the input/output function, type Y.
For details, see Appendix 1.

6) Selecting a monitoring method

When communication with the PMC starts normally after ON-LINE (SELECTED
PROGRAM) is selected, the selected program is compared with that held on the PMC. If
the programs do not match, the dialog box shown below appears.
Select a desrred function.

[LOAD] : A program is loaded from PMC memory and the selected program
is overwritten.
[STORE] : The selected program is stored to the PMC. The selected program
replaces the program already on the PMC.
[SELECT] : The selected program is modified.
[CONTINUE] : The selected program appears on the ladder monitor screen, but
the program already on the PMC is not replaced. Note that ladder
monitor display is not performed correctly.
[END] : The on-line function terminates.

N:E-3160 Selected program is not same.

1 Load 1 Load from PMC program memory.

IStore) Store to PMC program memory.

Select program.

IDisregard] Disregard difference.

1 Quit 1 Quit On-Line function.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (e)

(Note) If the selected program does not match the program on the PMC the dialog box shown
above appears. This occurs, for example, when a single program is modified by means
of off-line editing or by using an internal edit functron.
When the on-line monitor function is started for a program that is loaded or stored, the
dialog box does not appear. Instead. the subprogram selection screen appears
immediately.

- 189-
 4. OPERATION

(4) Displaying the PMC status (icon)

The on-line functron indicates the current PMC statuses, using Icons at the right end of the
status line.

(a) Display positions and types of icons

Displayed position
of icon

1. File 2. Diagnose 3, l/o 4. ~OmWniCakiOn

I
t t r
000

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (f)

0 PMC alarm status

The following icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarm state.

Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC Gray : Alarm not exiits on PMC

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (g)

(2, Ladder executron status

The following icon indicates whether a ladder program is running.

Program on PMC Program on PMC

is running. is stopped.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (h)

(3) PMC communication status

The following icon rndrcates whether a communication link with the PMC is established.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (i)

-190-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.1.3 Menus

The following figure shows the menu configuration of the on-line function. For details of each
function, see the corresponding sections.

On-line function - -1 I. File File save

Off-Line Function
-E
Exit

-_; !. Diagnose Ladder Monitor (on-line Editor)

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC Parameter Timer

-I-
Counter

PMC alarm status

I: Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Load from PMC

Store to PMC

- F-ROM write

4. Communication - Communication

Fig. 4.6.1.3 Menu Configuration

 4. OPERATION

4.6.2 Preparation

Before attempting to use the on-line function, make the following preparations:

0 Connect the PMC to the personal computer via an RS232C cable. (4.6.2.1)

($1 Check and set the parameters for the PMC. (4.6.2.2 to 4.624)

4.6.2.1 Connecting the cable

Connect one end of the RS-232C cable to the COMl or COM2 port of the personal computer.
Specify the selected port in the PARAMETER dialog box, called from the SET
COMMUNICATION dialog box of the on-line function.
Connect the other end of the cable to the RS232-1 or RS232-2 port on the main board of the
CNC. Specify the selected port in the CHANNEL parameter of the PARAMETERS FOR
ONLINE MONITOR screen of the PMC. When the cable is connected to RS232-1, specify 1
for CHANNEL. When the cable is connected to RS232-2, specify 2 for CHANNEL. .

- 192-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.2.2 Parameter screen for on-line monitor

The parameters for the orvline monitor are set using the PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE
MONITOR screen. Pressing the [MONIT) then [ONLINE] soft keys on the PMC menu screen
causes the on-line monitor parameter screen to appear.

PARAMETER FOR ONLINE MONITOR MONIT RUN

,. .,.
CPU ID =

RS-232C = &Q/NOT USE

CHANNEL = 1
BAUD RATE = 300/600/1200/2400/4800~ih%tti/19200
PARITY = *ONE/ODD/EVEN
STOP BIT = 1 BIT/%.'&S
TIMER 1 = 0
TIMER 2 = 5000
TIMER 3 = 15000
MAX PACKET SIZE = 1024

RS-232C=INACTIVE : 0

EMG ST INIT

Fig. 4.6.2.2 (a)

[Note] 1. When using the g-inch CRT screen, the PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR
screen is displayed using two pages. To switch from the current page to another
page, use the <Page Up> or <Page Down > key.
[Note] 2. The CRTMDI is necessary when the parameter is set on the PARAMETERS FOR
ONLINE MONITOR screen.

- 193-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.2.3 Modifying parameters

Some of the parameters can be modified by the cursor on screen moved by the cursor keys, and
some of them can modified by entering number or characters with the cursor on them.

[INIT]
Soft key [INIT] initializes all these parameters to the default value. In most case, you dont
have to modify any initial parameters, however, you should confirm the CHANNEL and
BAUD RATE parameters at least.

[Note] 1. The parameters CHANNEL, BAUD RATE, PARITY and STOP BIT must
correspond with the parameters used by On-Line Function of FAPT LADDER, which
can be set at Parameter dialog box of Communication dialog hoc. And these
parameters are independent of the parameters used in [LOJ screen which can be
changed on [SPEED] screen.
2. A modified parameter becomes valid when the on-line monitor driver next starts
operating. After modifying a parameter, specify NOT USE for the RS-232C
parameter to stop the on-line monitor driver. Then, restore the setting to USE. This
operation validates the modified parameter.

4.6.2.4 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function

When using the on-line function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the on-line
monitor driver that provides the communication function of the PMC. The setting of the RS232C
parameter on the parameter screen of the on-line monitor controls the operation of the on-line
monitor driver. Setting USE for the parameter starts the on-line monitor driver. The driver
occupies the line specified in the CHANNEL parameter and enters the wait state. In this state, the
PMC and personal computer can be connected.
When the on-line monitor driver starts, the status indication at the bottom of the screen changes
from INACTIVE TO STAND-BY.

RS232C = INACTIVE : 0
1
RS-232C = STAND-BY : 21

Conversely, setting the RS232C parameter to NOT USE stops the on-line monitor driver. In this
state, the PMC cannot be connected to the personal computer. Another input/output function can
use the RS232C line connected to that channel only after termination of the on-line monitor driver.
Once the on-line monitor driver stops, the status indication changes to INACTIVE. If the parameter
is set to NOT USE while the PMC is connected to the personal computer, the on-line monitor
driver stops as soon as the personal computer is disconnected. While disconnection is pending,
STOPPING is displayed as the status.
The following statuses can be displayed:

- 194-
 4. OPERATION

Status indication Status of the on-line monitor driver

INACTIVE The on-line monitor driver is not operating.

STOPPIMG The on-line monitor driver is waiting for the personal

computer to be disconnected.

STARTING Start processing for the on-line monitor driver is in progress.

STAND-BY The on-line monitor driver is operating.

CONNECTED The on-line monitor driver is connected to the personal

computer.

NO OPTION The reader/punch interface function is not supported.

TIMEOUT ERROR The connection was lost because of a time-out error.

DISCONNECTED The connection terminated normally. (Same status as

STAND-BY)

NO CONNECTION The cable is not connected.

[EMG ST]
Pressing the ]EMG ST] soft key immediately stops the on-line monitor driver irrespective of
whether the connection is currently established. Use this key if the connection cannot be
terminated normally because of abnormal communication condrtions.

[Note] 1. If USE is specified as the control parameter of the on-line monitor driver, the on-line
monitor driver starts automatically when the CNC is subsequently turned on. The
on-line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating. In this state, other
inputioutput functions cannot use the line.
2. While the on-line monitor driver is operating, the following functions cannot be used:
[PMCLAD], [IO], [EDIT], [SYSPRM].

4.6.2.5 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function (Only for Power
Mate-H)

When using the on-line monitor function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the
driver that provides the communication function of the PMC. When starting or stopping the driver,
It is necessary to set either of the following parameters.

l Parameter screen for on-line monitor (PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR)

Parameter RS-232-C = USE : On-line monitor driver is used.
NOT USE : On-line monitor driver is not used.

[Note] The CRT/MD1 is necessary when the parameter is set on the PARAMETERS FOR
ONLINE MONITOR screen.

l Bit 6 of parameter No. 0101 in the Power Mate-H

 4. OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #f #6

#6 = 0 : On-line monitor driver is not used.

1 : On-line monitor driver is used.

When either of the following conditions consists, the driver is started.

0 Parameter RS-232-C is USE.

l Bit 6 of parameter No. 0101 in the Power Mate-H is 1

[Note] 1. The on-line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating.
In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the line.
If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to display the above-
mentioned parameter and stop the on-line monitor driver.
2. While the on-line monitor driver is operating, the following functions cannot be used.
l [PMCLADJ, [l/O), [EDIT], and [SYSPRM] functions on CRT/MDI.
l [EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], and (I/O] functions on DPLIMDI.

4.6.3 File

4.6.3.1 File save

A program modified with online editor or transferred from PMC will be lost unless executing this
File save function.

(1) Menu position

To activate Save program dialog box, pull down [ 1, File] menu, and select [File save] on the
menu.

Il. File 1

Fiie ,s&
.... ...
Off-Line Function
Exit

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (a)

-196-
 4. OPERATION

(2) diaglog box view

Program name
I
C: Y DATA% SAMPLE c Source program name to be
saved, is displayed.

Save program Close diaglog box

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (b)

(3) Operation

(a) Pressing the [OK] button

@ When specifying a new program name
The program is saved and the dialog box closes.

@I When specifying an existing program name

A dialog box, shown below, prompting the operator to specify whether the program is to
be overwritten appears, as follows:
[OK] : The program is overwritten.
[CANCEL] : The program is not overwritten. The dialog box appears again.

Overwrite this program ?

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (c)

- 197-
 4. OPERATION

0 When the contents of an edited program have not been preserved by selecting F7
[UPDATE] on the on-line edit function (See Section 4.6.4.1, Ladder monitor.)
The File save operation becomes invalid. A dialog box appears, as shown below.
Press the < Enter > or -z Esc > key to close the dialog box.

IN.E- 3158 Ladder diagram has been modified. I

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (d)

(b) Pressing the [CANCEL] button

The specified file is not saved, and the dialog box closes.

4.6.3.2 Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function

The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. For details, see 4.5 Off-Line
Function.

(1) Menu positlon

To use Off-Line Function, pull down [I. File] menu, and select [Off-Line Function] on the
menu.

4.6.3.3 Exit

This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

(1) Menu position

Pull down [ 1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

1. File

File save
Off-Line Function
Exit

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (a)

- 198-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Dialog box view

Are you sure you want to exit ?

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (b)

(3) Operation

(a) Push [OK] button.

Online function ends lnitfal Menu appears.
For details, see Section (4.6.4.1 Ladder Monitor)

When modifications made with online editor have not yet saved by executing File
save operation, the following dialog box appears.

fl Source program name to be

I
I saved, is displayed.
Save changes ?

pq

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (c)

[Yes] : File save is executed and On-Line Function ends.

[No] : The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-Line Function
ends.
[Cancel] : Cancel to [Exit]

- 199-
 4. OPERATION

0 When there are any modifications which have not been preserved by cF7>
[UPDATE] on the online editor. this File save operation is canceled. And the
following dialog box appears.

Ladder diagram has been modified

Sure to quit ?

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (d)

[Yes] : The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-Line Function

ends.
[No] : Cancel to [Exit].

4.6.4 Diagnose

12. Diagnose] menu contains the menu Items as shown below.

Lddder Monitor for Ladder Monitor/Online Editor window

1
PMC Status for PMC Status window
Signal Status for Signal status window
PMC Parameter + for sub-menu of PMC Parameter windows
PMC alarm status for PMC alarm message dialog box
RUN/STOP the ladder for RUNSTOP the ladder dialog box
System Information for System Information dialog box

-2oo-
 4. OPERATION

1. File

[Level Signal Status NET 00001-00006

PMC Parameter +
PMC alarm status
RUN/STOP the ladder
DO
L
I
ROOOO.O
DO
-IL
SUB 1
END1

SUB 2
END2

'SUB 64
END

F7 FB F9 FlO

SpLisl Search Symbol Setinc

<Shift > +
s + F8
S-Se1

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (a)

- 202 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) Ladder monitor function

The table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor function.

Moving the cursor to the

selecting a subprogram

Symbol Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol] (e)

comment defined at a
specified address

Setting Switching between ladder FlO : [Setting] (f)

monitor and on-line editing,
switching between symbol
display and comment display

(c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList])

A ladder program is monitored and edited in units of subprograms. This function is used to
list existing subprograms and to select the subprogram to be displayed.

- 203 -
 4. OPERATION

@I Subprogram list display screen

Pressing F7 (SpList] causes a window to be displayed, as shown below. Select the
program to be displayed by pressing a cursor key or the <Page > key then the
c Enter > key.

[Note] The on-line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported.
The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.

Sub*program ,list-

rJimLZ
LEVEL2
PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl
PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll
SPOOOlO (GRIP WORK PIECE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK
PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2
PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (b)

@ Display information
The following information appears on the subprogram screen

LEVEL1
LEVEL2
Ladder - PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl
(No mark) PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll
Step _IpPOOOIO1 (GRIP "OR; PIECE) PICK UP ~A WORK ON THE STAND

Sequence
(S mark) I I
Symbol Coil comment
Sub-program No.

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (c)

(d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data (<Shift > + <F8>)

ii> Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])

A search for a net starts when the < FB> key is pressed after the search data has
been entered.
If the < F8> key is pressed without specifying any search data, a search is made for
the data set specified in (.a below, Entering search data (see (b)).
A search can be made for several types of data, as described below:

- 204 -
 4. OPERATION

@Address/symbol
Searching for an address: address + < F8> Example) X0000.0 + < F8 >
Searching for a symbol: symbol + <F8> Example) SYMBOLI + < F8 >
lFunctional instruction number/name
Searching for a number: S + functional-instruction-number + < F8 >
Example) Sl + < F8 >
Searching for a name: functional-instruction-name + < F8 >
Example) ENDI + < F8 >
lNet number: net-number + < F8 > Example) IO + < F8 >

0 Entering search data (< Shift > + < F8 >)

Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 0, described above, can
be registered. To repeatedly search for identical data, use this function. While this
function is active, the following dialog box appears.
To position the cursor to another item, press the c Tab > key. To change the setting,
press the < 7 > or < 1 > key.

;earch Data : . Data Kind

xoooo.o]
. ADDR/SYMBOL
@ WRT-COIL
@ FUNCTION
0 NET-NO
J

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (d)

.SEARCH DATA Enter the search data: address, symbol, net number, functional
instruction name, functional instruction
number (number only, without S)
.DATA TYPE Select the type of the search data.

- 205 -
 4. OPERATION

(e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL])

This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified address. When
eF9> is pressed, the following dialog box appears.

Address [ I Relay Comment [ 1

Symbol [ 1

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (e)

ADDRESS : Enter the address of the symbol or comment to be

displayed.
SYMBOL : The symbol at the specified address is appears.
RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specified address appears.
. COIL COMMENT : The coil comment at the specified address appears. .

(f) Setting a function (FlO [SET])

This function includes the following:

. LADDER MODE: Switching between ladder monitor and on-line

editing
For details of the on-line edit function, see (2) On-
line editing in this section.
. SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY:Selecting the address display mode in ladder
monitoring or on-line editing
Three types of data can be displayed: address,
symbol, and relay comment.
FUNCTION PARAMETER: Selecting whether the parameters of
functional instructions are to be
displayed
When the < FlO > key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears:
To move the cursor to another item, press the <Tab> key. To change the setting, press
the < t > or < 1 > key.

- 206 -
 4. OPERATION

Dpisplay satking

- Ladder Mode

@Ladder Monitor OOnline Editor

-Symbol 6 Comment Display 7

l Symbol
(1 Address
0 Relay Comment
(3 Symbol & Address
0 Relay Comment & Address
(7 Relay Comment & Symbol

Fig.4.6.4.1(f)

(2) On-line editing

To select the "OnlineEditor"screen, select [Ladder monitor] from the 12. Diagnose] puff-
down menu. then press F10 : [Setting). The Display setting dialog box appears. In the

dialog box, select [OnlIne Editor].

-Ladder Mode

(1 Ladder Monitor @Online Editor

-Symbol & Comment Display -

l Symbol
0 Address
(3 Relay Comment
0 Symbol 6 Address
(3 Relay Comment 6 Address
0 Relay Comment 6 Symbol

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (g)

- 207 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) On-line editing

On-line editing operations (1)

modification

c Delete 7, again

number + cF6>

_ine deletion - deletion

\let, line, element <Ctrl> + <Fi 7

nsertion

- 209 -
 4. OPERATION

On-line editing operations (2)

ursor movemen e cursor up or

the cursor to the left <4->, <+>

Symbol Displaying the symbol or F9 : (Symbol] See (l),

comment defined at a Ladder
specified address monitor.

Setting Switching between ladder FlO : [Setting] See (I),

monitor and on-line editing, Ladder
switching between symbol monitor.
drsplay and comment display,
etc.

3thers Updating the ladder program F7 : [UPDATE] (i) 0

Restortng the ladder program < Shrft > + < F7 > (i) @I
to the state existing prior to
editing

(c) Changrng the input mode

To change the input mode on the edit screen, use the following keys.
The current Input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. When
nothing is displayed, it indicates that overwrite mode is selected (default).

0 Insert mode
Key : -c Insert Z
Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode, the contact or coil is
inserted at the cursor posrtion.
Cancel : Press the <Insert > key in insert mode.

~8 Delete mode
Key : < Delete >

-210-
 4. OPERATION

Function : When the line connect function is used in this mode, data at the cursor
position is deleted.
Cancel : Press the < Delete > key in delete mode.

(d) Input Contact/Coil

To input a contact or coil. register the input element in the key input line, then press the
<Enter > key.
The registered element is added to the ladder diagram. The following keys are used for
this operation:

[Keys used for registration]

0 Set + t-
Key : <Fl >
Function : Set + t_ at the input line.

An addressed 4 k is input to the key input line by entering an address and

pressing the < Fl > key.

0 Set ---I i t-
Key : <Shift > + < Fl >
Function : Set + / + at the input line.

An addressed --I / I-- is input to the key input line by entering an address and
pressing the <Shift > and < Fl > keys.

0 Set U
Key : <F2>
Function : Set e at the input line.
An addressed u is input to the key input line by entering an address and
pressing the <F2> key.

0 Set +
Key : <Shift > + <F2>
Function : Set e at the input line.
An addressed e is input to the key input line by entering an address and
pressing the <Shift > and CF2> keys.

6) Set -(S)-
Key : -z Shift > + < F3 >
Function : Set -(S)- at the input line.
An addressed -(S)- is input to the key input lrne by entering an address and
pressing the < F3 > key.

G3 Set -(R)-
Key : < Shift > + < F3 >
Functron : Set -(Ft)- at the input line.
An addressed -(R)- is input to the key input line by entering an address and
is pressing the < Shilt 7 and < F37 keys.

-2ll-
 4. OPERATION

Select Contact/Coil
Key : <TAB>, <Shift> + <TAB>
Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line.
<TAB > changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the forward
direction. < Shift > + -Z TAB > changes reverse.
The contacts and coils are displayed in the order indicated below:

Change address only

Key : address + < Enter >
Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing input line.
The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.

[Input Key]
@ Input ContactCoil

Key c Enter >

Function Write ContactCoil which is set at input line to ladder diagram.

(e) Connect/delete line

0 Input -

Key <F4>
Function Input horizontal line. If In the delete mode, delete Contact/Coil or
horizontal line.

(2) Entering I

Key <F5>
Function A vertical ltne IS entered to the right of the cursor position. In
delete mode, a vertical line is deleted.

(f) Inserting a net, line, or element

(1) Inserting a net

Key : <Ctrl> + Fl [Netlns]
Function : inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursor position.

-212-
 4. OPERATION

0 Inserting a lrne
Key : < Ctrl > + F2 (Lilns]
Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the cursor is
positioned.

0 Inserting an element
Key : < Ctrl> + F3 [Elmlns]
Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position.

(g) Cut and paste function

CO Specifyrng a range
Key : < Ctrl> + F4 [Select]
Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. The range is specified by
means of the following procedure:
i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desired range.
ii) Press the <Ctrl> and < F4 > keys. (SEL is displayed .at the
bottom right corner of the screen.)
iii) Position the cursor to the last net in the desired range.
Cutting and copying of a specified net range is explained in @I
or @I below.
Cancel : Press the < Ctrl > and < F4 > keys in range mode.

0 Cutting a net
Key : <Ctrl> + F5 [Cut]
Function : Cuts a net. When a net range is specified, the specified net range
is cut. The cut portion is saved in the buffer for subsequent
pasting.

0 Copying a net
Key : <Ctrl> + F6 [Copy]
Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting. When a net
range is specified, the specified range is copied.

GO Pasting a net
Key : cCtrl> + F7 [Paste]
Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied and saved into the
buffer.

-213-
 4. OPERATION

(h) Cursor
0 Move cursor Up/Down
Key : <T>,<l>
Function : Up/Down cursor, When press < 1 > at the top of the screen or
press < 4 > at the bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

r3 Move cursor to Left/Right

Key : <c> , <+>
Function : Move cursor to the left/light. When pressing < +> at the left end
of the screen, the cursor moves to one line above and right end.
When pressing < -+> at the right end of the screen, the cursor
moves one line below and left end.
At the top.bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

@ Move to thww top of ladder

Key : -z Home >
Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder

0 Move cursor to the bottom of ladder

Key : <End>
Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

0 Previous page
Key : < Page Up >
Functron : Go to the previous page.

@iI Next page

Key : -c Page down >
Function : Go to the next page

(i) Others

6) Update
Key : <F7>
Function : Update the modrfication to the ladder diagram on PMC.

Note) When the [UPDATE] function is used, the ladder program on the PMC is modified.
Before executing lhrs function, check whether modification of the ladder program is
permitted.

-214-
 4. OPERATION

@I Undo
Key : < Shift > + < F7 >
Function : Restore ladder diaggram just before the last update < F7 >

Note) Applying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editrng since the last update to be lost.

4.6.4.2 PMC Status window

PMC Status window displays the status of program on PMC.

(1) Menu position

To activate PMC Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Status] on
the menu
2. Diagnose

d Ladder Monitor
PMC Statue- .
Signal Status
PMC Parameters +
PMC alarm status
RUN/STOP the ladder
System Information

(2) Window view

!iEkq
***/** l -Series/Edition of PMC
*a**/** -Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card

PMC TYPE
PMC-*'* -Connected PMC type

SCAN1
CUR Oms 7 Current scan time
MAX Oms -Maximum scan time
NIN Oms-Minimum scan time

Date/Time
oo/oo/oo -Month/Date/Year
oo:oo:oo 7Hour:Minute:Second

Fig. 4.6.4.2 (a)

-215-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.4.3 Signal Status window

Signal Status window displays the status 01 stgnals on PMC in real time. You can examine the
signal status of any PMC address, and you can also change the signal status on this window.

(1) Menu position

To activate Signal Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [signal Status]
on the menu.

\/ Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Statue
PMC Parameters --f
PMC alarm status
RUN/STOP the ladder
System Information

(2) Window view

When [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown below appears.

(a) Window view without symbols :

Signal Status ,. .
,, ,,..,;, ;, ..,,, ,,, ... ,.,,.;.,
ROOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 : 01
ROOOOl 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80
R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 :lC
R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo
R00006 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 : AA
R00007 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 : 55
R00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (a)

-216-
 4. OPERATION

(b) Window view with symbols :

Cursor

,-&WORK1 t -OFF- -ON-

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f.

ROOOOl f' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOOL1
R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PMC Address Hexadecimal expression

Byte symbol

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (b)

(c) Function keys:

F4 F8 FlO
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (c)

(3) Operations

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

c Page up >: < Page down > Move address area on window.

<TAB >!< Shaft > + <TAB > Skip to next/previous kind of address.

c Enter > Alternate signal status. <Enter > key turns the signal status ON
whrch was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. c Enter > key is
effective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

[ Symbol]:[Adress) < F4 > Display/Hide symbols.

address + [Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

[Wrt On];[WrtOff] cFlO> Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is

effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlock.

-217-
 4. OPERATION

(Warning) Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes should always be made with
extreme care. Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes can have
serious and unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process to which it
applies, if they are improperly used. It is recommended that these functions not be
used with people near the equipment.

(Note) Attempts to change some signal statuses may fail. At an address to which
sequence programs, the CNC, MMC, l/O Link and other external l/O devices write
repeatedly, the signal status cannot be changed. (The CNC repeatedly writes to F
addresses, the MMC to M addresses, and external 110 devices to X addresses.)

(4) Message

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If the
attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to
cancel change.

4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter

PMC Parameter sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows below.
0 Timer window
@ Counter window
0 Keep relay window
6I Data table control window
6) Data table window

To display the Parameter submenu, display the [2. Diagrose] pull-down menu, then select [PMC
Parameter] from the menu.
The submenu can be displayed by pressing the < + > or < +> key with the cursor positioned to
[ PMC Parameter].

!. Diagnose

J Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
PMC Parati&ei
PMC alarm status
e Tf@rl

Counter
., ......
I
RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay
System Information Data table control
Data table

-218-
 4. OPERATION

(Warning) When changing a signal status or PMC parameter, extreme care is necessary. If
the function for modifying the signal status or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly,
the machine may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel are
present near the machine.

(Note) If you can not write PMC parameter, it might be protected.

For the detail, please refer PMC programing manual.

(1) Timer window

Timer window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. You can examine the contents
of PMC Timer address, and you can also change the values for TMR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion

To active Timer window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Parameter] on
the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Timer] which activates Timer
window.

12. Diagnose 1

d Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Sicinal Status
PM; Eiara,,tert' i*Timet: . ,.
PMC alarm status Counter I
RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay
System Information Data table control
J Data table

(b) Window view

0 Window view without symbols:

Ti er
: . .. ,.: ,.:..,
.:
1. TOO000 600000 11. TO0020 0
2. TO0002 0 ~ 12. TO0022 0
3. TO0004 0 13. TO0024 0
4. TO0006 0 14. TO0026 0
5. TO0008 0 15. TO0028 0
6. TOO010 0 16. TO0030 0
7. TO0012 0 17. TO0032 0
8. TO0014 0 18. TO0034 0
9. TO0016 1000 19. TO0036 0
10. TO0018 0 120. TO0038 0
Fig. 4.6.4.4 (a)

-219-
 4. OPERATION

@ Window view with symbols:

ker
. :

*1. T%OOOO 600000 6. TOO010 0

2. TO0002 0 7. TO0012 0

3. TO0004 0 8. TO0014 0
ONE SECOND
4. TO0006 0 9. TO0016 1000

5. TO0008 0 10. TO0018 0

Byte symbol

PMC Address

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (b)

0 Function keys:

F4 F8 FlO
Symbol Search Wrt On
ii
or or

F4 FlO
Adress WrtOff
1---T- II

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (c)

(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the [TIMER] window.

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

c Page up >, -z Page down > Move address area on window.

number + <Enter > Change timer value. Enter new timer value in milli-seconds.
You can enter new value only when the write-protection is
unlocked.
The valid timer values are :
O-3,145.680 ms for timer No. l-8
o-523.280 ms for timer No. 9-150

[SymbolJ/[Adress] < F4 > Display/Hide symbols.

- 220 -
 4. OPERATION

I I
Basrc operation I Function

address + [Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter
address, T, C, K, and D. at the Timer window. When C, K or
D address is specified to search, Timer window is closed and
the special window for the address is opened with the address at
top of window.

number + [Search] < F8 >

ISearch timer address by timer number.

[Wrt On)/[WrtOff] < FlO >

I Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is
effective the cursor IS yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tried to change timer value although write-protected.

If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer
[No] to cancel change.

(2) Counter window

Counter window displays the contents of PMC Counter address. You can examine the
contents of PMC Counter address, and you can also change the values for CTR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion

To actrvate Counter window, pull down 12. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Parameter]
on the menu. Then sub-menu appears whrch contains item [Counter] which activates
Counter window.

!. Diagnose I
r/ Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Sianal Status
P&K Parameteif 3 Timer
PMC alarm status Cotinter
RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay
System Information Data table control
Data table

-221-
 4. OPERATION

(b) Window view

When [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.
0 Window view without symbols :

,., ..
+ati 141:
. ;..,.,.:;.;.:
.,., .... :.::.;
.
.... .Y: ,.: .. . ,.,.
., ....
.: :. ..

No. Address Preset/Current No. Address Preset/Current

1. cooooo lOta/ 347 11. c00040 o/ 0
2. coooo4 256/ 129 12. coo044 o/ 0
3. COO008 O/ 0 13. COO048 o/ 0
4. coo012 o/ 0 14. COO052 o/ 0
5. COO016 O/ 0 15. COO056 o/ 0
6. c00020 O/ 0 16. COO060 o/ 0
7. COO024 O/ 0 17. COO064 o/ 0
8. COO028 36/ 0 18. COO068 o/ 0
9. COO032 O/ 0 19. c00070 o/ 0
10. COO036 o/ 0 20. COO076 o/ 0
Fig. 4.6.4.4 (d)

@ Window view with symbols:

7 Cursor

n ;eic :;: ,: : 2. :.:: :_.::,_; ,:.:,; :: ..,

No. Address Preset/Current

WORK COUNTER
pzY_, cooooo lOOO/ 347 6. c00020 O/ 0

I
2. coooo4 256/ 129 7. TO0024 O/ 0

3. COO008 O/ 0 8. COO028 36/ 0

4. coo012 O/ 0 9. COO032 O/ 0

5. COO016 J_
10. COO036 O/ 0

Symbol l - Current counter value

Preset counter value
Counter number and Address

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (e)

@I Functton keys :

F4 F8 FIO
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (e)

-222-
 4. OPERATION

(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER] window.

Basrc operatron Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

< Page up > I c Page down > Move address area on window.

number + c Enter > Change timer value. You can enter new value only when the
write-protection is unlocked.
The valid counter values are :
O-65,535 for binary counter
O-9,999 for BCD counter

(Symbol]/(Adress] < F4 > Display/Hide symbols.

address + (Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter
address, T, C, K, and D, at the Counter window. When T, K
or D address is specified to search, Counter window is closed
and the special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.

number + [Search] < F8 > Search counter address by timer number.

[Wrt On][WrtOff] < FlO > Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is
effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message

Meaning and countermeasure

You tried to change counter value although write-protected.

If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer
[No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window

Keep relay window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address. You can examine the
signal status of PMC Keep relay address, and you can also change the status of Keep relays.

(4 Menu position
To activate Keep relay window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select (PMC
Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Keep relay] which
activates Keep relay window.

!. Diagnose

/ Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
PMC Paramtrtojt -+ Timer
PMC alarm status Counter
RUN/STOP the ladder Kaf3p relay
System Information Data table control
Data table

- 223 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) Window view

~Address 7 Cursor

I.+c
,. .. .. .,.
I
F KOOOOO
_IL
,.,
0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Keep
.:
Y.
@l&y

KOOOlO
:...:: .:I..

0
:

0 0 0
,,

0
.. ::

0
.,
.:I, ..i.,.. :..
.,.

0
: ,. . ,j

0
KOOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KOOOll 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00014 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KOO005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00017 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00019 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4
(g)

@I Function Keys :

F8 FlO
Search Wrt On

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (h)

(c) Operations

Basic operatron Functron

Cursor keys Move cursor.

< Page up > i < Page down > Move address area on window.

< Enter > Alternate slgnal status. <Enter> key turns the signal status ON
which was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. <Enter> key is
effective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

address + [Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter
address, T, C, K, and D, at the Keep relay window. When T,
C or D address is specified to search, Keep relay window is
closed and the special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.

[Wrt On]i[WrtOff] < FlO> Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is

effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

- 224 -
 4. OPERATION

(d) Message

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify 7 You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If the
attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to
cancel change.

(e) Data for PMC control software

Some keep relay data are used by PMC control software.
In this manual, the addresses related to the operation of the On-line function are
described.
For the detail, please refer PMC programming manual.
(The addresses marked I* do not effect the operation of the On-line function but used by
PMC control software.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #l #O

DTBLDSP * * MEMINP + l
PRGRAM LADMASK

#7 DTBLDSP 1 : Can not display data table control data in PMC parameter.
#4 MEMINP 0 : Can not change signal status.
#l PRGRAM 0 : Can not activate On-line Editing and the functions in I/O menu.
#O LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #l #O
* * * * * l * FROM-WRT

#O FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying F-ROM write dialog box when exiting On-line editing.

(4) Data table control window

Data table control window displays the informations of Data groups for PMC Data table
address. You can examine the Data group attributes. and you can also change the attributes
on this window.

(a) Menu position

To activate Data table control window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select (PMC
Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item (Data table
control] which activates Data table control window.

-225-
 4. OPERATION

d Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
Timer
PMC alarm status Counter
RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay
System Information Dhta table control"~. ::'
Data table

(b) Window view

0 Window view with symbols :

Cursor

,.
D&ta tabLe control. :
....... .:..: .
5
JO. Start address Number Type Format Protection .
+
1. DATA-TABLE-TOP 8000 byte Hex on

2. DO0050 10 word Dee off

3. TOOL-TABLE 20 word Dee off

4. DO0200 100 byte Dee off

5. BCD-CONV-TABLE word BCD 0 f:f

I
I
Data size
Start address: I
symbol of the group Data format Write-protection

Data group number Number of element

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (i)

(?,I Function keys:

F4 F8 FlO
Symbol Search Wrt On

or

FlO
WrtOff

-226-
 4. OPERATION

(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the Data table control window. Table of
the data table control display (1).

Basic operation I__ Function

Cursor keys I Move cursor.

< Page up > i < Page down > Move address area on window
I
D-address + c Enter > Change Start address with the cursor on the item. You can
enter new address only when the write-protection is unlocked.
You can omit the leading character D of the address.

number + < Enter > Change Number with the cursor on the item. You can enter
new number only when the write-protection is unlocked.

< Enter > Change Type, Format and Protection with the cursor on
the item. When the cursor is on Type or Format, small
dialog box is displayed to choose the item. You can change
them only when the write-protection is unlocked.

Table of the data table control display (2).

Basic operatron Function

[New]<Fl> Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data group on the
cursor. A hundred data groups can be created at most.

[Delete] c F2 > Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot delete all the data
groups because one data group must exist at least.

[G.Data] < F3> Switch to Data table window. The data group which the cursor
was on is displayed.

[ Symbol][ Adress] < F4 z= Display/Hide symbols.

address + [Search I< F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter
address, T, C, K and D, at the Data table control window.
When T, C, K or D address is specified to search, Data table
control window is closed and the special window for the
address is opened with the address at top of window.

number + [Search] < F8 > Search data group by data group number.

(Wrt On]/[WrtOtf] < F10 > Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is
effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

-227-
 4. OPERATION

(d) Messages

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although write-protected.

If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer
(No] to cancel change.

(5) Data table window

Data table window displays the contents of PMC Data table address according to Data
groups defined by Data table control data. You can examine the contents of Data table, and
you can also change the values of Data table on this window.

(a) Menu position

To activate Data table window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC
Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Data table] which
activates Data table window.

2. Diagnose

d Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Siqnal Status
Timer
PMC alarm status Counter
RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay
System Information Data table control
t)atii:tdbl(i:

(b) Window view

When [Data table] is selected. the following window appears

@ Window view without symbols :

1
Data table
..
Group 1 : DO0000 - 007999, 8000 bytes. hexadecimal, protected

DO0000 F6 DO0010 co DO0020 00

DO0001 FF DO0011 FE DO0021 D8
DO0002 EC DO0012 80 DO0022 00
DO0003 FF DO0013 FD DO0023 BO
DO0004 D8 DO0014 00 DO0024 00
DO0005 FF DO001 5 FB DO0025 00
DO0006 BO DO0016 00 DO0026 BO
DO0007 FF DO0017 F6 DO0027 00
DO0008 60 DO0018 00 DO0028 00
DO0009 FF DO0019 EC DO0029 00

Frg. 4.6.4.4(k)

- 228 -
 4. OPERATION

Data group information:

Group 1 : DOOOO- D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, rotected

t
t
Area of Data group Data format
t T
I
Number of element Write-protection
Data group number
and data size

@ Window view with symbols :

I Data group rnformation

-Data table. : .,

~Groupl:DOOOOO - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

DATA-TABLE-TOP
-DO0000 .:.. F6 DO0005 FF DO0010 co
A
DO0001 FF DO0006 BO DO0011 FE

DO0002 EC DO0007 FF DO0012 80

DO0003 FF DO0008 60 DO0013 FD

DO0004 D8 DO0009 FF DO0014 00

- Symbol I Cursor

- Address

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (I)

@ Function keys:

F3 F4 F8 FlO
C.Data Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

T-1 F4
Adress

Ftg. 4.6.4.4
(m)

- 229 -
 4. OPERATION

(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the [DATA TABLE1 window.
Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

-z Page up > J< Page down > Move address area on window.

<TAB s/c Shift > + c TAB > Skip to next/previous data group.

number + < Enter > Change data value. You can enter new value only when the
write-protection is unlocked. The valid data values are :
For details of the values that can be input, see the table of input
data values below.

(CData] < F3 > Switch to Data table control window.

The displayed data group is displayed at top of the window.

[Symbol)/[Adress) < F4 > Dtsplay/Hide symbols.

address + [Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter
address, T, C, K and D, at the Data table window. When T, C
or K address is specified to search, Data table window is
closed and the special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.

number + [Search] < F8 > Search data group by data group number.

[Wrt On]/(WrtOff] < FlO > Unlock write-protectionGte-protect. When the protection is
eflective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

Data table

I byte I word double-word (dword)

Decimal -128 -127 -32,768 -32,767 -2.147,483,648 - 2,147,483,647

BCD 0 - 99 0 - 9,999 0 - 99,999,999

00 - FF 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF

(d) Messages

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tned to change data table value although write-protected.
If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer
(No] to cancel change.

- 230 -
 4. OPERATION

4.6.4.5 PMC alarm status

The PMC ALARM MESSAGE dialog box displays a PMC alarm message.

(1) Menu position

To activate PMC alarm message dialog box, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC
alarm status] on the menu.

d Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
PMC Parameter -_)

System Information

(2) Window view

When [PMC alarm status] is selected, the following dialog box appears.

ALARM NOTHING

Fig. 4.6.4.5 (a)

(3) Operation
Press c Enter >, < space > or < . > key to close PMC alarm message dialog box.

(4) Messages
The alarm messages same as PMCs are displayed in this window.
See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages.
For details of messages, refer to the following manual:
FANUC PMC MODEL PAliPAB/RAlIRA2RA3/RBIRB2/RB3IRB4/RB5/RB6iRC/RC3/RC4~
NB/NB2 Ladder
Language Programming Manual (B-61 863E)

-231 -
 4. OPERATION

4.6.4.6 Executing or stopping a ladder program

The ladder execulron status can be changed from RUNNING to STOP or from STOP to
RUNNING.

(1) Displaying the dialog box

To display the IRUNSTOP the ladder] dialog box, display the 12. Diagnose] pull-down menu,
then select [RUNSTOP the ladder] from the menu.

2. Diagnose

4 Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
PMC Parameter -3
PMC alarm status
: ?.g?JNpJ*iiop..f& ::&$&&$f
System Information

(2) Displaying the dialog box

When [RUN/STOP the ladder] is selected, the dialog box shown below appears.

(a) Ladder running state

While a ladder program is being executed, the following dialog box appears.

Frg. 4.6.4.6 (a)

[YES] : Stop the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the ladder program.

- 232 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) Ladder stop state

While a ladder program is in the stop state, the following dialog box appears.

RUN the ladder program ?

Fig. 4.6.4.6 (b)

[YES] : Executes the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder program

(Warning) When executing or stopping a ladder program, special care is necessary, If a

program is applied incorrectly, the machine may act unpredictably.
Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the machine.

4.6.4.7 Displaying System Information

The system software information such as specifications, version, and etc can be referred

(1) Menu position

To display System Information dialog box, pull down 12. Dragnose] menu, and select
[System Information] on the menu.

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
PMC Status
Signal Status
PMC Parameter +
PMC alarm status
RUN/STOP the ladder
System Xnformation

(2) Displaying dialog box

When [System lnformatton] is selected, the following dialog box appears.
Press -Z Enter >, < Space > or <. > key to close System Information dialog box

System Information

FAPT LADDER-II
A08B-9201-J503
Version 01.2 96.01.09
Copyright(C) 1995. FANUC LTD

Frg. 4.6.4.7 (a)

- 233 -
 4. OPERATION

4.6.5 Input/Output

The 13. I/O] menu provides the following options:

1. For the [LOAD FROM PMC] dialog box

2. For the [STORE IN PMC] dialog box
3. For the [WRITE F-ROM] dialog box

(Note 1) In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position, etc.) might slow when
using input/output functions (Load from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).
There is no problem in the operation of NC. It is recommended to using input/output
functions while NC is not operating.
(Note 2) When screen made by C language executor is displayed, the communication speed
decreases. It is recommended to use input/output functions after moving to other
screens (Posrtion, etc.).

4.651 Loading from the PMC

A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer.

LOAD FROM PMC IS used to transfer a ladder program from the PMC to the personal computer
when, for example. using the program with the on-line function.

(1) Menu position

To dtsplay the LOAD FROM PMC dialog box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then
select (Load from PMC] from the menu.

- 234 -
 4. OPERATION

(2) Displaying the dialog box

Selecting ILoad from PMCI causes the following dialog box to appear.

LOad from pMc .. .:,l:.:j..

..::..: ... .::.. ,\....:,.
,.,......./. .:.....&, .,.....(
y,,::...::

- Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

0% 100%
I 1
j .. _r^ izeindicator
Programs

Abort loading

Execute loading Close dialog box

Fig. 4.6.5.1 (a)

(3) Operation
Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the < Enter > key.
Once the program has been loaded normally, the dialog box closes automatically.

4.6.5.2 Storing to the PMC

A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.

Use Store to PMC to transfer a ladder program from the personal computer to the PMC to
enable, for example, the use of the program with the on-line function.

Menu position
To display the Store to PMC dialog box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then select
[Store to PMC] from the menu.

-235-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Displaying the dialog box

Selecting (Store to PMCI causes the following dialog box to appear.

stag* tQ p#fc . ;. .::: .,:.:

:: : ,..I :.j. ..

: ,. .,

-Transfer data type

0 LADDER 0 ALL

0% 100%
f--- Load program size indicator

I Aborl storing
I
Execute storing Close dialog box

Fig. 4.6.5.2 (a)

(3) Operation
Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the c Enter > key.
Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closes automatically.

(Note) While Online Edrtor is in progress, a program cannot be stored to the PMC. To
enable storing to the PMC, move to Ladder Monitor.
If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to the PMC but before the
program is written to F-ROM, the results of editing will be lost. When storing a
program to the CNC, therefore, write it to F-ROM (see Section 4.6.5.3).

4.653 Writing to F-ROM

The results of editrng by the on-ltne function are written to flash ROM (F-ROM) in the PMC.

(Note) The results of rnodificatron made using Online Editor, Store to PMC, etc. will be lost
tf the CNC is turned off before the results are written to F-ROM. To store the modified
results to the CNC. write them to F-ROM.

- 236 -
 4. OPERATION

(1) Menu position

To display the Write to Flash ROM dialog box, display the 13. I/O] pull-down menu, then
select [F-ROM Write] from the menu.

rri

(2) Displaying the dialog box

Selecting [F-ROM Write1 causes the following dialog box to appear.

Write.to Flaeh R&l. : .. . .c.

: ..

Are you sure you want to write to

Flash ROM ?

IExec/ICancel]

I Close dialog
t box
Execute write

Fig. 4.6.5.3 (a)

(3) Operation

(1) Push [Exec] button.

Start to write sequence program to Flash ROM and Executing message is displayed on
this dialog box.
@ When writing to Flash ROM is completed, Normal Complete message is displayed on this
dialog box.
Cg, Select [Cancel] or Press < ESC > and this dialog box is closed.

(Note) The CNC must be placed tn the state of emergency stop when writing to Flash ROM.

-237-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.6 Communication

This function establishes or disconnects a communication link between a personal computer and
PMC. The on-line function can be used only while a communication link is established between
the personal computer and PMC. Before attempting to use the on-line function, therefore, establish
the communication link.
Selecting [ON-LINE FUNCTION] or [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] from the initial menu
causes the communication link to be established automatically. (See Section 4.6.1.2, Starting the
on-line function.)

(1) Menu position

To display the Communication dialog box, display the 14. Communication] pull-down menu,
then select [Communication] from the menu.

(2) Displaying the dialog box

(a) Displaying the Communication dialog box

Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box to appear:

Communication

communication

Fig. 4.6.6 (a)

(b) Displaying the PARAMETER dialog box

Selecting [Param] from the Communication dialog box causes another dialog box to
appear as shown below.
Press the <Tab7 key to select the desired parameter, then set that parameter by pressing
a cursor key.

-238-
 4. OPERATION

- Serial port
(Choose channel)

c - Baud rate
(Choose one of parameters)

- Parity

T
- Parity bit
l None (3 Odd (.) Even

-Stop bit

01 bit l 2 bit - Stop bit

t
T-_rl

t
Close dialog
I
box canceling modifications
Close dialog box

Fig. 4.6.6 (b)

(Note 1) If the communication link cannot be established successfully, check the following
points:
0 Is the RS232C cable securely connected to both the personal compuler and
CNC?
e/i, RS-232C cable:
. Is the cable an On-Line cable? (See Appendix 8.)
Is the cable free of damage?
(3 Communication parameters (baud rate, parity, slop bit) of the on-line function:
Do FAPT LADDER and PMC have identical communication parameters?
If the communication link cannot be established even after these problems have
been corrected, turn off then restart the personal computer.
(Note 2) Do not attempt to set communication parameters until after disconnecting the
communrcatron link.
Do not termrnate the on-line function untrl after drsconnecting the communication
link.
Do not drsconnect the RS232C cable until after disconnecting the communication
link.

-239-
 4. OPERATION

4.6.7 Examples of operation

This section provides the followrng two examples of using the on-line function:

0 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

@ Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

4.6.7.1 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

(1) Connecting the RS-232C cable

(a) Connect one end of the RS232C cable to the COMl or COM2 port of the personal
computer.

(b) Connect the other end of the RS-232C cable to the R232-1 or R232-2 port on the main
board of the CNC.

(2) Setting the parameters for the on-line monitor on the PMC

(a) Press the CNCs [PMC], [MONIT], and [ONLINE] soft keys in that order. The
PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen appears.

(b) Set the communicatton parameters. (See Section 4.6.2. Preparation.)

(c) Specify USE for the RS232C parameter. Check that the RS232C status Indication
changes to STAND-BY.

(Note) If USE is specified for the parameter, STAND-BY status is automatically selected when
the CNC is nexl turned on. In this case, this operation is unnecessary.

(3) Starting the on-line function

(a) Start FAPT-LADDER II by executing the following command:

C: +r FLADDER >fladder
(When FAPT-LADDER II is installed under C: y FLADDER)

- 240 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) The title screen 01 FAPT LADDER-II appears. After a few seconds, the initial menu
appears as shown below. The initial menu contains the series and edition of FAPT-
LADDER II.

RBI(STEP SEQ) [ C:YDFITRYSWLE 1

RO8B-9201-5503 Version 01.0

Press [TFIBIkey to move the cursor and

press [ENTER] or lSPRCE1 key to select

-
Off-Line Function I

I On-Line Function I

1 On-Line (selected program)

I Utilltu I

I Exit I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (a)

(c) Select [ON-LINE FUNCTION] from the initial menu

(d) The on-line monitor screen appears as shown below. Communication with the PMC starts
automatically.

Try to connect with PllC ___ 08130 WOO J/Cancel/I

F7 F8 FY FlO
Spl ist Search Synbol Seting

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (b)

-241 -
 4. OPERATION

(Note) If communication cannot be established, select the [Param] button in the

Communication dialog box. Check the setting in the Parameter dialog box which
subsequently appears.

:.. : :.i ;.,: .::i..:.::.; :..I..

w=mwter..
,,, ,,,, .I.: . . .... .,. .. . . ,.
.\.. . . : :: ... . .:.::>
,, .
.,., :.:: ....>:I::.:.::.::.:
.
is:::..
t.....
.

- Channel

0 COMl 0 cot42

- Stop bit

01 bit l 2 bit

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (c)

(e) When communication starts normally, the Communication dialog box closes
automatically. The Load from PMC dialog box appears, and a program is loaded from the
PMC

- Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (d)

(Note) II the most recently monitored program is used, the processing required to load the
program can be omitted. (If an identical machine is monitored continuously, the loading
time is reduced.)
 4. OPERATION

(4) Selecting a subprogram

(a) After a program IS loaded from the PMC, the Sub-program list dialog box appears as
shown below:

subiprogram ,ii,=t .. ;
. . / ., .:. .:

L&v&{1 : ,., .,., 2 .:... <::.: I::;.: j ..). ,/,:, : 2,. .,..; :I; ,:. ;,I:;: ;::;.
LEVEL 2
PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Rl
PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Ll
PO0010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK
PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2
PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (e)

(b) By pressing the < 7 > or < 1 > key, position the cursor to the subprogram to be
dlsplayed.

(c) Press the <Enter7 key.

(d) The ladder diagram for the specified subprogram is displayed.

- 243 -
 4. OPERATION

Monitoring action of ladder diagram

The Ladder Monitor window is displayed as following.

(a) Displaying the Ladder Monitor window

1. File 2.Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

I 1
.:.. .... ,......
:I,;..;:::,
La&de* Moni&i :.: y::, . :::.:;::I:i_:.:-.:-_::i.:il;:~,l:
. . : .. .: ..
[LEVEL i] NET 00001-00006

DO00
ROOOO.l
r\
I
DO00 ROOOO.O
r\
v
I I

. SUB 1
END1

F7 F8 F9 FlO
SpList Search Symbol Seting

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (f)

(b) Monitoring contact and coil status

Contacts and coils are displayed to Indicate their status: ON (1) or OFF (0). They are
displayed with thick or thin line according to their status as follows.

ON (1) OFF (0)

-1 k Thick Thin

w Thin Thick

--( F Thick Thin

q )-- Thick Thin

- (S)- Thick Thin

__ CR)_ Thick Thin

(c) Moving In the ladder

The area dlsplayed on the window can be moved by cursor-up/down key and <Page
up >< Page down > Function key < F8 > [Search] is useful to jump directly to your
destmation.

- 244 -
 4. OPERATION

(4 Searching for a net

To move to a desired position, enter the number of the net to be displayed, its address, or
functional instruction number (Sxxx). Then, press function key F8 [SEARCH].

(e) Openrng the Display setting dialog box

Pressing function key FlO [SET] causes the Display settrng dialog box to appear.

biepfay setting

- Ladder Mode

(1) Ladder Monitor. Online Editor

-Symbol 6 Comment Display -

. Symbol
0 Address
0 Relay Comment
c> Symbol b Address
@Relay Comment & Address
cj Relay Comment 6 Symbol

1
- Function Parameter

0 Display

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (g)

(f) Displaying functional instruction parameters

Position the cursor to Function Parameter and check Display. Then, press the
<Enter> key to close the Display setting dialog box. The functional instruction
parameters appear as shown below:

-OFF-
RST SUB 36 0002
+ I
ADDB
TCTRL- 1
ACT TCNT-1
---i t
I 121
0000000001

NXT-TCNT
I 131

u_
Conlents of address 1
TCNT-1 Contents of address
NXT-TCNT

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (h)

- 245 -
 4. OPERATION

(b) Checkmg the alarm state

When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm icon changes from gray
to yellow. Should this occur, select 12. Diagnose] and open the PMC alarm message
dialog box. Then, check the details of the alarm state. (For details of icons, see (4),
Displaying the PMC status (icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

v ., .. .

... . . .\. & ... : .._., mawage

.::...iMrnt

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (k)

(cl Checking whether a program is running

While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (I) is visible. When no
ladder program is running, the icon indicated in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (m) is visible. (For details of
icons, see (4), Displaying the PMC status (icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

Program on PMC
is running.

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (I) Fig. 4.6.7.1 (m)

To change the ladder program execution status, select 12. Diagnose] then use the
RUNiSTOP the ladder dialog box.

(d) Displaying the communication status

While communication with the PMC is being performed, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (n)
is visible. When communication with the PMC has not been established, the icon indicated
in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (0) is visible. (For details of icons, see (4). Displaying the PMC status
(icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

iiiiz!l /

Fig. 4.6.7.1
Communication
is active.

(n)
Communication
is not active.

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (0)

When changing the status of the communication being performed with the PMC, use the 14.
Communrcation] dialog box.

- 247 -
 4. OPERATION

(7) Monitoring signals

(a) Opening Signal Status window

Pull down the 12. Diagnose] menu, select [Signal Status] from the menu, the Signal Status
window is displayed,

GO0000 0,. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo
GO0005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo
GO0007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
GO0008 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 : 00
600009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (p)

and the functions of function keys change as following.

F4 F8 FlO
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

F4
Adress
III

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (q)

(b) Searching Address

Enter RO.0 and press function key < F8 > (Search], the address ROOOOO is displayed at top
of the window, and the cursor moves onto signal of ROOOOO.O.

Signal Status

ROOOOO 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42
ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (r)

- 248 -
 4. OPERATION

(cl Displaying symbol

Function key <F4 > [Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on the window, just above the
corresponding signal. Symbols defined for byte address are also displayed just above their
addresses on the window. When the symbols are displayed, the function key c F4 > changes
to [Adress] which hides the symbols.

byte symbol bit symbols

:.. ,,. .: y ,..:I., _)

. signal SPatus
I . . .
I
CONST -ON- -OFF-
ROOOOO 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0' : 42

ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

IR00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo I

Fig. 4.6.7.1
(s)

(d) Unlocking write-protection

Press function key < FlO> [Wrt On] to unlock write protection of the contents of addresses
displayed on the window. The color of cursor changes to red from yellow. And the function
key < FlO > changes to [WrtOff].

(Warning) Signal status changes should always be made with extreme care. Signal status
changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system, and on the
process to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is recommended that
these functions not be used with people near the equipment.

- 249 -
 4. OPERATION

(e) Changing status

Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys, <Page up> and <Page down> to the
signal you want to change, then press <Enter> key to make the signal status change.
<Enter> key turns a signal status ON which was OFF, and turns a signal status OFF which
was ON.

Signa Stat&s

CONST -ON- -OFF-

ROOOOO 0 L 0 0 0 0 L 0 : 42

ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 02

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (t)

(Note) Some signals may not change their status even if you change them, because the Ladder
diagram writes the signals frequently, or the signals are frequently updated by NC. MMC,
or the external I10 devices such as l/O-Link: NC writes signals on F-address, MMC on
M-address, and the external l/O devices on X-address.

(f) Enabling write-protection again

Press function key <Flop [WrtOff) to re-protect the contents of addresses on the window
from unforeseen changes. The color of cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function
key cFlO> returns to [Wrt On).

(9) Hrdrng Signal Status wrndow

Pull down the 12. Diagnose] menu, select [Ladder Monitor] from the menu, then the Signal
Status window drsappears.

(Note) Non-volatrle PMC address T, C, K and D which is called PMC parameter has special
window to display and modify them (see 4.4.5 for detail).

-250-
 4. OPERATION

(8) Storing a program to flash memory

A program edited using the on-line function is written to flash memory of the PMC. If the CNC
is turned off before the program is written to flash memory, the results of editing will be lost.

(a) Displaying the Write to Flash ROM dialog box

Select 13. I/O] from the menu bar. Select [F-ROM write] from the menu. The Write to
Flash ROM dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to store the edited program.
(The Executing message appears.

., :. wrjtc
..
:-korraskl RCIH
Are you sure you want to write to
Flash ROM ?

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (u)

After the program has been stored, the dialog box closes automatically.

(9) Storing a program to a file

A program edited using the on-line function can be named and stored to a file. The stored
program can be decompiled and edited using the off-line function.

(a) Storing a program to a file

Select 11. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [File save]. The Save program dialog
box appears as shown below. Select ]OK] to store the edited program.

save program

Program name

YFLADDERYSAMPLE

piq
I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (v)

After the file has been stored. the Save program dialog box closes automatically

(Note) When a program held in the memory of the PMC is monitored or edited, the program is
named PMC-RAM by default. To store the program, rename the program in advance.
The data of PMC-RAM is automatically updated when another program is monrtored or
edited.

-251 -
 4. OPERATION

(J) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line function

Select [l. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [Exit).
A message dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to end the on-line function.

II Are you sure you want to exit ?

I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (W)

4.6.7.2 Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

To transfer a program created using the off-line function to the PMC and subsequently execute it,
start the on-line function as described below:

(1) Selecting a program

Select [Program Selection] from the initial menu. Then, enter the name of the program to be
used.

RBd(STEP SEQI [ C:YDFITRYSRlVLEI

ROBB-YZOl-J503 Werslon 01.0

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and

press [ENTERI or [SPFICEIkey to select.

Off-Line Function I

On-Line Function I

On-Line (selected program)

I ut I I Itu I

I Exit
I

Fig. 4.6.7.2 (a)

-252-
 4. OPERATION

(2) Starting the on-fine function

Select [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] from the initial menu.
If compilation or decompilation is necessary, either of the following messages is displayed.

ISource program has been updated. Compile it ? (Y/N) I

Memory card format file has been updated. Decompile it?(Y/N)

In this case, enter Y to compile or decompile the program.

(3) Storing the program to the PMC

When the on-fine monitor is started, the personal computer is automatically connected to the
PMC, and the selected program is compared with a program held on the PMC. If the two
programs match. the subprogram selection screen is displayed. If not, a dialog box is
displayed as shown below:

N:E-3160 Selected program is not same.

71 Load from PMC program memory.

[Stole/ Store to PMC program memory.

-1 Select program.

IDisregard] Disregard difference.

Quit On-Line function.

Fig. 4.6.7.2 (b)

In this case, select [STORE] to transfer the selected program to the PMC.

(Note) The dialog box shown above appears when the program selected on the personal
computer does not match that on the PMC. This is because either program is modified
either by off-fine editing or with the internal edit function, for example.
When the on-fine monitor is started with the program stored in the PMC selected, the
dialog box shown above does not appear. Instead, the subprogram selection screen
appears.

The ladder monitor and signal monitor can be operated as described in Section 4.6.7.2,
Monitoring a ladder program on the PMC.

- 253 -
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

This chapter describes the general messages output by FAPT LADDER-II. Messages are output
and categorized as indicated below:

function-name : E-xxxx : error-message

L Error number (four digits)

Category (error, warning, etc.)

LL Name of the processing which caused the error

(1) Function name

The processing causing the error is represented by a single alphabetic character.

Function name Processing

A Initial menu and option setting

6 Title editing
C I/O module editing
D System parameter editing
E Ladder diagram/step diagram editing
F Symbol and comment editing
G Message editing
H Printing
I Compilation
J Decompilation
K Mnemonic conversion
L Input/Output
N On-line monitor

(2) Message category

Output messages are classified into the following categories. The categories are represented
by single alphabetic characters.

F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx.

The system can be operated, but processing of the user program cannot be continued because
of an error.
E: Error. The error number is Sxxx.
Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively, the processing is stopped.
W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx.
Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be guaranteed.

-254-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.1 A : INITIAL MENU

(program name selection, option setting, Oh-Line execution)
5.1 .l Fatal error

Number Messsge Contents

A:F-2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.
A:F-2001 1INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE. I
A:F-2004 THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED
AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LAD-
DER.
A: F-2005 SOURCEPROGRAMHASWRONG The source program contains an invalid file or does not con-
FILE (S). tain necessary files.
Check the source program files.
A:F-2006 1NOT FOUND XXXX FILE. I
A:F-2007 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PRO-
GRAM.
A:F-2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.
A:F-2009 1CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE. I
A:F-2010 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BRO-
KEN.

5.1.2 Error

Number Message Contents

A:E-3120 ENTER PROGRAM NAME. The name of the source program has not been input. Input
the source program name.
A:E-3121 THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES
NOT EXIST.
A:E-3122 PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND. The specified source program is not compatible with the sys-
tem. For details of which machine models are compatible,
see Section 1.2.2.
Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall
the system.
A:E-3124 CANNOT CREATE NEW PRO- The specified source program cannot be created because
GRAM XXXX. a directory having the same name already exists. Input
another source program name.
A:E-3125 ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PRO- The specified path does not exist. Check the input source
GRAM NAME. program name.
A:E-3126 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIF- A FORMAT-A/B program was specified when copying a
FERENT. source program. FORMAT-A/B cannot be used with FAPT
LADDER-II. Convert the program via a memory card or mne-
monic format file. For details, see Appendix 3.
A:E-3128 XXXX FILE READ ERROR File xxxx cannot be read.
I
A: E-31 30 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANL File xxxx cannot be read.
KEY.
A:E-3131 1 XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR. File xxxx cannot be opened.
A:E-3132
A:E-3133 T XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR
INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.
File xxxx cannot be closed.
The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free
space on the disk. Terminate the system and delete any
unnecessary files in the disk to create more free space.
A:E-3134 INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED. The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because Its
(XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.) data was destroyed.
A:E-3137 CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX. File xxxx cannot be created.

-25!3-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

A:E-3138 ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM
NAME.
I I

A:E-3139 lLL;ANLXMyX SOURCE PRO-

1 A:E-3140 1NOT FOUND FILE. I I

1 A:E-3143 1CANNOT OPEN FILE. 1File xxxx cannot be opened. I
1 A:E-3144 1CANNOT CLOSE FILE. I File xxxx cannot be closed.
A:E-3145 1FILE I/O ERROR. ( An error occurred during file access.
A:E-3146 t XXXX FILE I/O ERROR. I I
A:E-3147 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.
A:E-3148 XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT Data cannot be written to file xxxx.
ANY KEY.

5.2 B : TITLE EDITING

5.2.1 Error

Number Message Contemts

B:E-3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.
B:E-3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Datacannot be writtento the source programtitlefile (TITLE)
or control file (CONTROL).
BE-3022 FILE l/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY An error occurred during file access.
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.3 C : l/O MODULE EDITING

5.3.1 Error

Message Contents
C:E-3021 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be
read.

C: E-3022 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file
(IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL).
C: E-3023 INPUT DATA INVALID Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input
procedure.

C: E-3024 APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to con-
firm the input value range.
C: E-3025 APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to con-
firm the input value range.

C: E-3026 APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirm
the input value range.
C: E-3027 APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to
confirm the module names that can be specified.

C: E-3026 INPUT KEY NOT USED

C: E-3030 ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL
C: E-3032 THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.
C: E-3033 INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT
C: E-3034 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT O, IS SPE-
CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS
l/O UNIT B.
The specified module cannot be used at this address.
Check whether the output module is specified at address X
and whether the input module is specified at address Y.
The specified group, base, and slot have already been
assigned modules.
Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.
The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to
confirm which channels can be specified.
For I/O Unit-B (xxx:power-on/off information), a slot other
than slot 0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.

5.3.2 Warning

Number Message Contents

C:W4020 THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.
C:W4021 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT O, IS SPE-
CIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT
B.
C:W4022 BOTH I/O UNIT-A AND UNIT-B
ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME
GROUP.
The specified group, base, and slot have already been
assigned modules. Check whether the same numbers can
be assigned for the group, base, and slot.
For the I/O Unit-B module, a base other than base 0 cannot
be specified. Specify base 0.
I/O Unit-A and I/O Unit-B cannot be assigned to the same
group. Specify different groups.

-257-
 -8SZ-
ss3tmv 39vw1 ma a31 (01
ssmaav 35ww1 lla A~U (6
ssmaav a31 (8
ss3k4aav ~3n (L
:sseJppe t%y~o(lol eql Aweds (800~
JO pesn s! (wed JO)eMdO
03 W JW~W swwds W!W) 13NVd kiOlVU3dO (9 HOW3
u! Es S! (S3A) 1 uWM ss3Haav 13NVd kl3lVkl3dO tzoc-3:a
allvANI wa UldNl czoc-3:a
3niv~ al1vANl zzoc-3:a
(lOHlN03) aI!4lJW~ JO (VuVklVdSAS) al!l JW
-weJed ureisk uJeJ6oJd03Jnose~ioiue~yM eq iouum eiea ~3y ANV 11~ ~Olj~3 31l~M 3114 izoc-3:a
.peeJ eq louue~
(VuvtrvdsAs) w JwmJ~ uwsAs UeJEbJd a3Jnos wi A~W ANV IIH wow3 av3ti 3114 ozoc-310
muwJo3 ebsse~ JequnN
9Nllla3 td313WWWd InHlSAS : a ps
1sn39vss3vu klow3 3
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING

5.51 Fatal error

Number Message Contents

E:F-2100 CANNOT READ * FILE.
E:F-2101 CANNOT WRITE * FILE.
E:F-2102 CANNOT SEEK * FILE.

5.5.2 Error (at editing ladder diagram)

Number Message Contents

E:E-3100 INPUT INVALID
E:E-3101 1ADDRESS BIT NOTHING I
E:E3102 1RELAY OR COIL NOTHING I
E:E-3103 1HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL I
E:E-3104 1VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL I
E:E-3105 1ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. I
E:E-3106 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL
E:E-3107 PARAMETER NOTHING
E:E-3108 LADDER ILLEGAL
E:E-3109 ERROR NET FOUND
E:E-3110 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT
E:E-3111 1PLEASE COMPLETE NET I
E:E3112 ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED
E:E-3113 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
E:E-3114 FUNCTION NOT FOUND
E:E-3115 1LADDER BROKEN I
E:E-3116 1ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING I
E:E-3117 STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT)
ERR
E:E-3118 PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.
I I

E:E-3119 1PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.

E:E-3120 SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA TOO
LARGE
E:E-3121 1SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST I
E:E-3122 SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFER- A Format-B program was found to exist when renaming a
ENT FILE FORMAT Format-A program.
E:E-3123 ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME An invalid subprogram name was input.
E:E-3124 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB-
PROGRAM
E:E-3125 SAME SUB-PROGRAM NAME
EXISTS
E:E-3126 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION
WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU
SELECT TO ZOOM I********.
E:E-3127 SOURCE PROGRAM OF A Format-B program, having the same name as that speci-
ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS fied for the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist dur-
ing Format-A program editing.
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number 1 Messacle I Contents

E:E-3128 ILLEGAL SYMBOL A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during
symbol editing.
E:E-3129 PROGRAM OPEN ERROR
E:E-3130 PROGRAM NOT EXIST
E:E-3131 NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE
E:E-3132 PROGRAM NOT READ
I I

E:E-3133 1PROGRAM NOT WRITE

E:E-3134-7 DIRECTORY NOT EXIST
E:E-3135 1 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST
E:E-3136 1PROGRAM IS OPENED I
E:E-3137 PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER
E:E-3138 CAN NOT RENAME LATMP An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing
LATMP with the File function.
E:E-3139 1 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

5.53 Error (at editing step sequence)

Number Message Contents

E:E3200 ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE. A read error occurred when reading the specified intermedi-
ate code file.
E:E-3201 BUFFER SIZE OVER. An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.
E: E-3202 NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been
BIG. exceeded.
E:E3203 NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG. The maximum allowable number of branches has been
exceeded.
E:E-3204 SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG. The maximum allowable numberof element tables has been
exceeded.
E:E-3205 UNCONNECTED STEP The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.
SEQUENCE DIAGRAM.
E:E-3206 SELECTED BRANCH ERROR. The start sideof the select branch does not agree with its end
side.
E:E-3207 PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR. The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its
end side.
E:E-3208 SYNTAX ERROR. The sequence In the select branch is other than transition
to step to transition. Or, the sequence in the parallel branch
is other than step to transition to step.

E:E-3209 STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR. The step line contains an element other than initial step,
step, block step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (verti-
cal line).
E:E-3210 TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX The transition line contains an element other than initial step,
ERROR. step, block step, and jump (dummy step).
E:E-3211 CANNOT INSERT. Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if
inserted, the maximum coordinate value is exceeded.
E:E-3212 CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM. A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when
changing an element.

E:E-3213 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL. A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code
of the branch.
E:E-3214 JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR. The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.
E:E-3215 CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR. The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not
been completely checked.

-260-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

E:E-3216 CHART SEQUENCE ERROR. The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.
1 E:E-3217 1CHART START CODE ERROR. 1The chart start code does not exist (step). I
E:E-3218 CHART END CODE ERROR. The chart end code does not exist.

t---E:E-3219 JUMP CLOSE ERROR. JUMP has not been closed correctly.
E:E-3220 HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data
ERROR. exists before and after the branch code.)
E:E-3221 BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. The branch connection is invalid.
E: E-3222 BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR. There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and
end codes.
E:E-3223 CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS. The copy destination is invalid.
FEE3224 1CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. 1The move destination is invalid. I
1 E:E-3225 1ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. 1The specified coordinate value does not exist. I
1 E:E3226 / STRINGS NOT FOUND. I The specified character string does not exist. I
I E:E-3227 STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE
ERROR.
The specified step number is already in use. Check which
step numbers are already in use. I

I E:E-3228 LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE

ERROR.
The specified label is already defined.
I
IE:E_3229
CANNOT DELETE TEMPORARY The temporary file cannot be deleted.
FILE.
E:E-3230 ;;E;zWPROGRAM NAME The same file already exists, but with a different extension.

E:E-3231 INPUT INVALID. Data outside the address range is set.

E:E-3232 EXPECTED ADDRESS. No subprogram number is specified.

I E:E-3233

E:E-3234
TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUE
PROGRAM.
ILLEGAL FILE NAME.
An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight
layers. I

E:E-3235 SUB-PROGRAM ALREADY The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being
t--- , ENTRIED. edited.
1 E:E-3236 1CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. 1The intermediate code file cannot be deleted. I
E:E-3237 1CANNOT CHANGE DATA. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.

-261-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

55.4 Warning (at editing ladder diagram)

WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU

SELECT TO SAVE.
E:W4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION
WILL BE CANCELLEDJF YOU
SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.
.
E:W4110 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION
WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU
SELECT TO OVERWRITE.
E:W4111 MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PRO-
GRAM NOT CONSISTENCY !

-262-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.6 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING

5.6.1 Error

Number 1 Message Contents

F:E-3100 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.
F:E-3101 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO
LARGE
F:E-3102 SAME SYMBO LDATA EXIST
F:E-3103 NO DEFINITION ADDRESS
APPOINTED
F:E-3104 NOT FOUND DATA ERROR
F:E-3105 FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY
F:E-3106 1FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY 1
F:E-3107 1DATA SAVE ERROR I
F:E-3108 1SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS. 1
F:E-3109 t INPUT ADDRESS DATA. I
F:E-3110 1ILLEGAL SYMBOL. I

5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING

5.7.1 Error

Number Message Contents

G:E3100 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE-
CIFIED AT *.
G:E3101 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
G:E-3102 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF *
WERE DELETED.

-263-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.8 H : PRINTOUT
58.1 Fatal error

Number Message Contents

H:F-2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG
FILE(S). ($)
H:F-2066 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.
I

5.8.2 Error

Number 1 Message Contents

H:E-3100 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was
I insuffffient free space.
H:E-3101 1CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be opened.
H:E-3102 1CANNOT READ XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be read.
File xxxx cannot be found.
File xxxx does not exist.
The format of file xxxx is invalid.
H:E-3106 1CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE. Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.
H:E3107 1OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. An error occurred upon opening the output file.
H:E-3166 WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. An error occurred upon writing to the output file.
H:E-3109 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx
XXXX BYTE FREE bytes of free space.
1

H:E-3110 INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP
DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE
1FREE
H:E-3111 STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.
SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ
There is insufficient free space on the disk to pertom cross-
reference. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.
The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder dia-
gram has been exceeded. The maximum number of steps
that can be printed is 32767.
An error occurred upon reading symbol data.

NET COMMENT FILE READ An error occurred upon reading a net comment.
I

H:E-3114 SYMBOL 8. COMMENT DATA BRO- The symbol data is invalid.

KEN.

5.8.3 Warning

Number Message Contents

H:W-tlOO CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of
printing.
H:WAlOl CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. The <BREAK, key was pressed during file output.
H:W-4102 SEL SWITCH OFF The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL but-
ton such that the indicator lights.

-264-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.9 I : COMPILE
5.9.1 Fatal error

Number 1 Message Contents

I:F-2100 1NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE I
I:F-2101 1OUT OF MEMORY

5.9.2 Error

Number Message Contents

I:E-3100 XXXX READ ERROR The source program cannot be read. (This error normally
does not occur during compilation.)
I:E-3101 XXXX WRITE ERROR The compilation results cannot be written.
I:E-3102 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME An invalid source program name is specified. (This error
ILLEGAL. normally does not occur during compilation.)
I:E-3103 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT Source program xxxx does not exist. (This error normally
FOUND. does not occur during compilation.)
I:E-3105 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FOR- The source program format is FORMAT-A. (This error nor-
MAT IS DIFFERENT. mally does not occur during compilation.)
I:E-3107 SYSTEM PARAMETER READ The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.
ERROR.
I:E-3108 TITLE READ ERROR. The source file for the title data does not exist.
I:E-3109 I/O MODULE READ ERROR. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.
I:E-3110 VERIFICATION ERROR The input password differs from the registered password.
I:E-3111 THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED Input the password correctly.
AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHER
WORD
I:E-3112 ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND The input password contains a non-alphanumeric charac-
NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE ter.
ALLOWED
I:E-3200 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program
INSTRUCTION. exists.
I:E-3201 THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNC- A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.
TIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH
NEEDS THE COIL.
I: E-3220 SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAM- An out-of-range value is specified in a parameter of instruc-
ETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUC- tion xxxx.
TION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.
l:E-3221 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER- The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) con-
ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. tains a program number that does not correspond to the pro-
gram name.
I:E-3222 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER An out-of-range program number or an address other than
IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX a program number is specified in a parameter of instruction
INSTRUCTION. xxxx.
I: E-3223 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS An out-of-range label number or an address other than a
SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
INSTRUCTION.
I: E-3250 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. Specify the END1 or END2
instruction.
l:E-3251 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size
IS TOO LARGE. specified for the selected program type.
l:E-3252 LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. An unrecognizable instruction exists.
l:E-3253 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT Because the first level of the main program takes too long to
THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. execute, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level
smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in
the system parameter.

-265-

Number Message
I:E-3254 THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF
LADDER EXCEEDS 99.
l:E-3270 SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
I:E-3271 SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
l:E-3272 JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
l:E-3273 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.
I:E-3274 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT
BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.
l:E-3290 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTtON AT
THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.
l:E-3291 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB-
PROGRAM.
l:E-3292 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS
BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3293 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED
IN THE SUBPROGRAM.
I:E-3310 THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3311 THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTlON.
l:E-3312 THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3313 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS
BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3314 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS
BEYOND END2 INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3315 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS
BEYOND END3 INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3316 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS
BEYOND END INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3317 END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED.
l:E-3318 END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED.
I:E-3319 END3 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED.
I:E-3320 END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED.
l:E-3330 THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION.
5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Contents
Because the number of second level divisions in the main
program exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be
executed. Make the second level smaller, or increase the
ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.
SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be
used in the main program.
SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be
used in the main program.
The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram
to the second level of the main program. It cannot be used
in the main program.
The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subpro-
gram cannot be called from other than the second level of
the main program.
The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subpro-
gram cannot be called from other than the second level of
the main program.
A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate
the start of the subprogram.
A subprogram must end with the SPE instructiontojndicate
the end of the subprogram.
No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction
because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subpro-
gram.
The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram
because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subpro-
gram.
The END1 instructionis not found at the end of the first level.
The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second
level.
The END3 instructionis not found at the end of the third level.
No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction
because the END1 instruction indicates the end of the first
level.
No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction
because the END2 instruction indicates the end of the
second level.
No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction
because the END3 instruction indicates the end of the third
level.
No instructions can be placed after the END instruction
because the END instruction indicates the end of the entire
ladder program.
END1 is specified for other than the first level.
END2 is specified for other than the second level.
END3 is specified for other than the third level.
The END instruction is specified for the first level.
The COME instruction is not specified when the COM
instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction control
range, is specified.

Number Message
l:E-3331 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE
USED IN THE RANGE CON-
TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3332 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT
BE USED IN THE RANGE CON-
TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3333 ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION
CAN NOT BE USED IN THE
RANGE CONTROLED COM
INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3334 COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE
THE PAIR WITH COM.
I:E-3335 COME INSTRUCTION IS
DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE
OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFI-
CATION.
l:E-3340 THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3341 ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION
CAN NOT BE USED IN THE
RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3342 JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE
THE PAIR WITH JMP.
l:E-3343 JMPE INSTRUCTtON IS DEIECTED
THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL
NUMBER SPECIFICATION.
l:E-3350 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX.
l:E-3351 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED
TWICE OR MORE.
I:E-3352 TOO MANY LABELS.
l:E-3353 THE DESTINATION OF JMPB
INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/
COME INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3400 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED
INSTRUCTION.
I:E-3420 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER-
ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.
l:E-3421 AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS
SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3422 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER
IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
l:E-3423 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS
SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Contents
The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subpro-
gram cannot be called from within the COM instruction con-
trol range.
The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subpro-
gram cannot be called from within the COM instruction con-
trol range.
The COM instruction. that indicates the start of the instruc-
tion control range, is specified twice within the range.
The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruc-
tion control range, is specified when the COM instruction,
used to indicate the start of the range, is not specified.
The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the
instruction control range when the end of the range has
already been defined as a number of coils.
The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the
jump block, but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end
of the block, is not specified.
Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of
a jump block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indi-
cate the end of the first block.
A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is
specified when no JMP instruction,that indicates the start of
a block, is specified.
A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump
block when the end of the block has already been defined as
a number of coils.
The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indi-
cates the jump destination.
Two or more identical label numbers are found when defin-
ing jump destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify
unique label numbers.
The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL
instruction exceeds the maximum allowable number that
can be specified for the selected program type. Decrease
the number of defined jump destinations.
The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point
inside to a point outside the COM instruction control range,
or vice versa. JUMP operations can be performed only
entirely within the range or entirely outside the range.
The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or
an instructionthat cannot be used with the selected program
type.
The parameter of the program stat-linstruction (SP) contains
a program number that does not correspond to the program
name.
Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range step number or
an address other than a step number.
Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range program number
or an address other than a program number.
Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range label number or
an address other than a label number.
-267-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

LE-3440 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate
AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPRO- the start of the subprogram.
GRAM.
l:E-3441 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- the end of the subprogram.
PROGRAM.
l:E-3442 STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction
EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUC- because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subpro-
TION. gram.
l:E-3443 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram
IN THE SUBPROGRAM. because the SP instructionindkates the startof a subprogram.
l:E-3460 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label
ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump des-
STEP PROGRAMS. tination.
l:E-3461 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the num-
ber allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number
of jump destination definitions.
l:E-3462 DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP
DLBL. instruction.
l:E-3480 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a
ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE unique step number for each step.
STEP PROGRAMS.
l:E-3570 THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum num-
IS TOO LARGE. ber of characters that can be specified for the selected pro-
gram type. Reduce the total number of characters.
I:E-3600 DATA TOO LARGE. The combined size of the ladder program and the step
(LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) sequence program exceeds the maximum allowable size
specified for the selected program type. Reduce the size of
the ladder or step sequence program.
I:E-3601 DATA TOO LARGE. The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, lad-
(MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COM- der, and step sequence data exceeds the maximum allow-
MENT + LADDER + STEP SEQUE- able size specified for the selectecl program type. Reduce
NCE) the size of any of these data types.
l:E-3620 THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM The selected program does not contain any subprogram fife
xxxx. numbered xxxx. Create a subprogramfile having this number.
l:E-3640 LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PRO- The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level
GRAM EXISTS BEYOND END when it is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction
INSTRUCTION. is placed at the end of a subprogram when there is a subse-
quent subprogram having a higher program number.
l:E-3650 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC
instruction.
l:E-3651 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump des-
TWICE OR MORE. tinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label
number for each jump destination.
l:E-3652 TOO MANY LABELS. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations
defined in the main program exceeds the maximum allow-
able number specified for the selected program type.
Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in the
main program.
l:E-3653 THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed
EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL. in other than the second level because the JMPC instruction
specifies a jump from a subprogram to the second level of
the main program. Define label xxxx in the second level.
l:E-3654 THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC
THE RANGE OF THE COM instruction, is within the COM instruction control range.
INSTRUCTION. Place label xxxx outside the range.

-268-

5.9.3 Warning
Number Message
kW-4100 THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD
NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC
WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE
CODE.
I:W4101 ILLEGAL OPPANEL (PARAMETER).
PROCEED TO COMPILE USING
NO
I:W4102 EDITING SUEPROGRAM HAS
NOT COMPLETED.
I:W4103 MULTIPLE SUB-PROGRAMS WITH
SAME NUMBER EXIST.
I:W4104 THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FOR-
MAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS
IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT
I:W4105 THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FOR-
MAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS
IGNORED: NET COMMENT
I:W4200 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM.
I:W4201 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT
THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.
l:W4202 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA-
TION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS
NOT ALLOWED.
l:W4203 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA-
TION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS
NOT ALLOWED.
I:W4204 UNUSED NET COMMENT
POINTER FOUND.
I:W4400 THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE
PROGRAM.
I:W4500 THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
I:W4501 THE COMMENT DATA WHICH
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
l:W4502 COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS
64KB. SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA
IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.
I:W4570 THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
I:W4600 UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAM
xxxx.
5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Contents
The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These char-
acters are replaced by spaces.
Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are
not set when YES is specified for the system parameter indi-
eating whether the FO operator panel is to be used. The
value of this parameter is changed to NO during compilation.
There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been
completed. Complete the editing of this subprogram.
Twosubprograms haveidenticalnumbers(e.g., Pl.#lAand
Pl.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled
(Pl.#tA in the above example).
Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT-B.
The FORMAT-B data does not include a net comment.
Specifying this item has no effect.
The ladderprogram isempty. Thisladderprogramisnotout-
put to a memory card file.
The first level of the main program takes too long to execute.
Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder
execution time in the system parameter.
The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be spe-
cified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is
ignored, the end of the range being identified by the COME
instruction.
The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number
of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end
location being identified by the JMPE instruction.
The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment
character string. This pointer is not ouiqut to a memory card file.
The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence
program is not output to a memory card file.
The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be
handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
The comment data contains a special character that cannot
be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a
space.
More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment
data. None of the symbol and comment data is output to a
memory card file.
The message data contains a special character that cannot
be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a
space.
Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. This pro-
gram is, however, output to a memory card file.
-269-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.10 J : DECOMPILATION
5.10.1 Fatal error

Number Message Contents

J:F-2100 FUNCTION CODE ERROR. The function code specified in the memory card file does not
DATA:-, match that defined in the system. The files function code
SYSTEMx appears immediately after DATA; the systems function code
after SYSTEM. Install valid system data.
J:F-2101 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not
XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT match the selected program type. Select a valid program.
FILE.
J:F-2102 XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the
FILE NOT FOUND. file.
J:F-2103 MISMATCHED PASSWORD. The entered password is invalid. Enter the password cor-
rectly.
J:F-2104 XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.
FILE READ ERROR.
J:F-2105 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.
WRITE ERROR.

5.10.2 Error

Number Message Contents

J:E-3100 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED
INSTRUCTION.
J:E-3101 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB-
PROGRAM.
J:E-3200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA
IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS
THE LIMIT.
J:E-3300 ID CODE (l/O MODULE)
ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX)
There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be
used with the selected program type.
There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not
end with the SPE instruction.
The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the sys-
temdefined limitbefore the program was executed. The pro-
gram thus cannot be executed; reduce the symbol data size.
An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the l/O
module data. The program cannot be executed; prepare a
valid memory card file.

-270-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

510.3 Warning

Number Message Contents

J:W4100 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder
IS TOO LARGE. program exceeded the maximum number that can be speci-
fied for the selected program type. The subprogram is out-
put to the source program. Make necessary corrections by
editing the ladder diagram.
J:W4101 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net
POINTER FOUND. comment character string. These net comment pointers are
not output to the source program. Edit the ladder diagram
as necessary.

J:W4102 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT
STRINGS FOUND.
J:W4103 XXXX DUPLICATED NET COM-
MENT POINTER FOUND.
J:W4104 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS
USED TWICE OR MORE.
J:W4200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA
EXCEEDS THE LIMIT.
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)
J:W4201 XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLI-
CATED ADDRESS FOUND.
J:W4202 SAME SYMBOL EXISTS.
(ADDRESS XXXX. SYMBOL XXXX)
J:W4203 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)
J:W4204 SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL
(SYMBOL XXXX)
J:W4300 ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYS-
TEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO
DECOMPILE USING NO. operator panel specification.
J:W4301 THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT
FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D
ADDRESS.
xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to
any net comment pointer. These net comment character
strings are deleted. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.
xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Char-
acter strings are copied so that the same net comment char-
acter strings have the same net comment pointers.
Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps.
Edit the step sequence as necessary.
The total number of data items exceeded the system-de-
fined limit when the symbol data merge operation reached
the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx).
Data subsequent to this symbol data is not output to the
source program.
xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address.
Either the source data or the memory card data becomes
valid, depending on the setting of the symbol merge option.
The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol
data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at
another address. This symbol data is not output to the
source program.
The indicated symbol data (address: &symbol: xxxx)
was found to be invalid as a result of the IEC-cornpliant sym-
bol character string check. This symbol data is not output to
the source program. To output it to the source file, change
the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF file.
The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid
address. This symbol data is not output to the source pro-
gram.
The operator panel specification in the system parameter
data is invalid. Processing continues while ignoring the
The R/D extension address cannot be used because the
PMC version of PMC-RC is earlierthan 3. Change the PMC
version in the system parameter.

J:W4800 XXXX MEMORY CARD FORMAT The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. How-
FILE ILLEGAL. ever, processing continues.
J:W4900 OPTION READ FAILED. The file settings have returned to the defaults.
SE-I-I-ING HAS CHANGED INTO The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program can-
DEFAULT. not be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The
option reset function key may be used.

J:W4901 %%%FLSET.CNF READ FAILED. Symbol character check is not performed.

SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read.
CHECKED. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. When this check
is not made, processing may be continued even withoui
making the changes.

-271-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION

5.11 .l Fatal error

Number Message Contents

K:F-2006 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.
K:F-2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.
K:F-2006 NOT FOUND XxXx FILE.
K:F-2097 NOT FOUND XxXx SOURCE
PROGRAM.
K:F-2100 FILE I/O ERROR.
KF-2101 1SET-UP FILE BROKEN. I
K:F-2102 1ILLEGAL OPTION(S). I
K:F-2103 INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are
not specified.
K:F-2104 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. The functional instruction contains more parameters than
are required.
K:F-2105 ILLEGAL OPTlON-SPECIFIED FILE.
K:F-2106 1ILLEGAL IDCODE. I
K:F-2107 EXPECTED TERMINATOR.
K:F-2108 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM
SOURCE-PROGRAM.
K:F-2109 EXPECTED IDCODE.
K:F-2110 ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).
K:F-2111 CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN
CURRENT DIRECTORY.
K:F-2112 NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL
VARIABLE TMP.
K:F-2113 ILLEGAL NAME OF SET-UP FILE.
K:F-2114 1NOT FOUND SET-UP FILE.
K:F-2115 1EXPECTED /PC OPTION. I
K:F-2116 XxXx EXECUTABLE FILE NOT
FOUND. I
K:F-2117 1INPUT DATA ILLEGAL. I

-272-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11.2 Error

Number Message Contente

K:E-3100 XXXX FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.
K:E-3101 XXXX SYMBOL 8 COMMENT
DATA BROKEN.
K:E-3102 CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE The mnemonic of extended symbol %@2-C is converted
%@2-C. when %%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT-A/B file.
K:E-3103 CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE
PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYS-
TEM.
K:E-3104 ;;Z;OT OVERWRITE EXISTING

K:E-3105 CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of
OF PARAMETER. the functional instruction.
K:E-3106 CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.
ON BASIC INSTRUCTION.
K:E-3107 CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MOD- An output module is specified as the input addressof the I/O
ULE AT INPUT ADDRESS. module data.
K:E-3108 CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MOD- An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O
ULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS. module data.
K:E-3109 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address
PROHIBITED USING AS PARAME- parameter of the functional instruction.
TER.
K:E-3110 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT
ADDRESS.
K:E3111 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE
ADDRESS.
K:E-3112 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified as the output
ADDRESS. address parameter of the functional instruction.
K:E-3113 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified for the coil,
ADDRESS WITH COIL.
K:E-3114 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD An odd-number prohibited address is specified as an odd-
ADDRESS. number address.
K:E-3117 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a
multiple of 2.
K:E-3118 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a
multiple of 5.
K:E-3119 EXPECTED ADDRESS. The basic instruction has no address.
K:E-3120 EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.
K:E-3121 EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). The functional instruction has no parameter.
K:E-3122 IDCODE NOT FOUND IN XxXx.
K:E-3123 ILLEGAL ADDRESS. An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is
specitied in the symbol and comment data, or message data.
K:E-3124 ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction
TABLE. data table.
K:E-3125 ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAME- An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction
TER. address parameter.
K:E-3126 ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment
data, or message data contains invalid character data.
K:E-3127 ILLEGAL SOURCE-PROGRAM
NAME.

-273-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

K:E-3128 ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E-3129 ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. The system parameter contains an invalid data number.
K:E-3130 ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. The data number of the data identifier is invalid.
K:E-3131 ILLEGAL VALUE. The system parameter contains an invalid value.
K:E-3132 ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O mod-
ule data.
K:E-3133 ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O mod-
ule data.
K:E-3134 ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module
data.
K:E-3135 ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional
instruction.
K:E-3136 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-
ACTER(S).
K:E-3137 INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E-3138 1uNAMu:
SOURCE-PROGRAM

K:E3139 INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT

DATA.
K:E3140 INVALID FUNCTIONS NAME. An unsupported functional instruction is specified.
K:E-3141 INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.
K:E-3142 INVALID MODULE NAME. The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.
K:E-3143 RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS
E2BIG(=7).
K:E-3144 INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECI-
FIED SOURSE-PROGRAM.
K:E-3145 INVALID QUALIFIER. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment
data, ladder, or I/O module data is followed by an invalid
character.
K:E3146 LACK OF XXXX FILE.
K:E-3147 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
K:E-3148 MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.
K:E-3149 NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are
not specified.
K:E-3150 NOT FOUND BASE DATA. The base data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E-3151 NOT FOUND GROUP DATA. The group data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E-3152 NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. The module name of the l/O module is not found.
K:E-3153 NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. The slot data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E-3154 NOT FOUND XxXx PROCESS
INTERFACE FILE.
K:E-3155 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE-
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.
K:E-3156 NOT FOUND XXXX SUB PRO-
GRAM FILE.
K:E-3157 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is
specified.
K:E-3158 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out-of-range address is specified in the functional
TABLE. instruction data table.

-274-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number bmge Contents

K:E-3159 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF An out-of-range address is specified as a message setting
ADDRESS. address.
OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF An out-of-range address is specified in the functional
PARAMETER. I instruction parameter. I
OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruc-
tion parameter. I
1 K:E3162 / OUT OF VALUE. 1An out-of-range value is specified in the system parameter. 1
K:E-3163 OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA. An out-of-range value is specified in the base data of the I/O
module data.
K:E-3164 OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruc-
tion data table.
K:E-3165 OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An out-of-range value is specified in the group data of the
l/O module data. I

I K:E-3166 OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA.

PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.

An out-of-range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O
module data
1 K:E-3167
1 K:E-3168 PROCESS ERROR.
1 K:E3172 SOURCE-PROGRAM NOT FOUND.
I

K:E3173 SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT

FOUND.(XXXX) 1
SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT)
EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B XxXx.
SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER.
SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data.
K:E-3178 SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.
ITNOT FOUND. I I
K:E-3179 THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. have the same number.
K:E-3181 TOO LONG STRINGS. The length of the system parameter, message data, or title
data exceeds the maximum.
K:E-3187 TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 The number of characters entered on a line of the system
LINE. parameter, message data, title data, symbol and comment
mnemonic data, mnemonic data, or I/O module data
exceeds the limit.
(-3188 (TOO MANY PARAMETERS. 1The
are required.
functional instruction contains more parameters than
I
K:E-3189 TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT The sum of the base data and slot data values of the l/O
IS OVER. module data exceeds the maximum.
K:E-3190 UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. The data contains an undefined instruction.
K:E-3191 UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. An address is specified in a location where it is not required.
K:E-3192 UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). A parameter is specified !or an instruction that requires no
parameters.

I----
K:E-3193 UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER. A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parame-
ter or data identifier.
K:E-3194 DATA ENTRY ERROR. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.

I K:E-3195 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-

ACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA.
The symbol data contains a double-byte character.
I Doubkbyte characters cannot be used in symbol data. I

-275-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11.3 Warning

Number Message Contents

K:W4100 COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. Only symbol data was convened to the address.
K:W4101 DATA NOT FOUND. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment
data, message data, or I/O module data does not exist.
K:W4102 DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.
K: W-4 103 F)PECTED CONTROL CONDlTlON Nocontrol condition is specifiedforthefunctional instruction.

K:W4104 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE- Invalid character data exists in xxxx.
CIFIED AT XxXx.
K:W4105 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER). System parameter OP.PANEC contains an invalid value;
PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE the value is converted to NO.
USING NO.
K:W4108 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The symbol data is nonstandard (check levet-1). (For FOR-
MAT-C only)
K:W4!07 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- The message data contain a doubltiyte character.
ACTER(S).
K:W4108 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- Comment data containing a double-byte character was
ACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA. converted without the doubltiyte character cooversion
option (J option).
K:W4109 LOGICAL OPERATED WITH An operation was performed using a register that is not regis-
UNUSED REGISTER(S). tered in the ladder data.
K:W4110 LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.
REGISTER(S).
K:W4111 MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA Message data xxxx contains a double-byte or single-byte
OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT katakana character.
XXXX.
K:W4112 NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDI- Control conditions required for the functional instruction are
TION (S). not specified.
K:W4113 NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX No message is defined for address xxxx.
ADDRESS.
K:W4114 NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUM-
BERED XXXX.
--
K:W4115 NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED
xxxx.
K:W4116 NOT FOUND XXXX PMGCS FILE.
K:W4117 NOT USED NET COMMENT
POINTER EXIST. XXXX
K:W4118 OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).
K:W4119 OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.
K:W4120 INVALID QUALIFIER. An invalid character follows the end code % of the system
parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder
data, message data, or I/O module data.
K:W4121 REGISTERS OVERFLOW.
K:W4122 SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE During conversion to Format-B, data that does not belong
FOUND AT END OF LADDER to level 1 to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates
DATA. that there is data subsequent to the last SPE.
K:W4123 SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE, The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data al
AND SLOT. have the same number.
K:W4124 SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP)
AT I/O UNIT-B AS I/O UNIT-A.

-276-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Mesaage Contents

K:W4125 SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE)
EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B.
K:W4126 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF XXXX
WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF
EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.
K:W4127 TOO MANY CONTROL CONDI- The functional instruction is subject to too many control
TIONS. conditions.

K:W4128 UNEXPECTED COIL(S). A coil was specified when not required by the functional
instruction,
K:W4129 UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDI- A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction
TION(S). for which no control conditions are required.
K:W4130 REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address.
DATA. When the start code of thesymbol data is%O2, the symbol
definition must not be specified more than once. The second
and subsequent definitions are ignored. For information
relating to the start code, see Section 4.5.8.3.
K:W4131 REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA. The same symbol is specified for two or more different
addresses. Symbols other than the first specified symbol
are replaced by spaces.
K:W4132 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYM- The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the
BOL DATA. maximum (six characters for FORMAT-A and FORMAT-B;
16 characters for FORMAT-C). The symbol data is replaced
by spaces.
K:W4133 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM- The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The com-
MENT DATA. ment data is replaced by spaces.
K:W4134 SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST Two or more different symbols are specified for the same
address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical symbol may be spe-
cified in more than one location.) Symbols other than that
specified first are replaced by spaces.
K:W4135 RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more diierent character strings are specified for the
EXIST. same relay comment at the same address. (For FOR-
MAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in
more than one location.) Relay comments other than that
specified first are replaced by spaces.
K:W4136 COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the
EXIST. same coil comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C,
an identical character string may be specified in more than
one location.) Coil comments other than that specified first
are replaced by spaces.
K:W4137 COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the
EXIST. same comment title at the same address. (For FORMAT-C,
an identical character string may be specified in more than
one location.) Comment titles other than that specified first
are deleted.
K:W4138 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For
COMMENT DATA. FORMAT-C only) The relay comment data is replaced by
spaces.
K:W4139 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For
COMMENT DATA. FORMAT-C only) The coil comment data is replaced by
spaces.
K:W4140 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM- The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For
MENT TITLE DATA. FORMAT-C only) The comment title data is replaced by
spaces.

-277-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT
5.12.1 Error

Number Message Contents

L:E-3106 NOT EXIST XxXx FILE. File xxxx does not exist.
L:E-3101 ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR The currently set cassette or module does not match the cur-
rently selected machine model.
L:E-3102 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E-3103 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
L:E-3104 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.
L:E-3105 FILE CLOSE ERROR The specified file cannot be closed.
L:E-3106 INVALID RECEIVE DATA Data other than an IS0 code has been received.
L:E-3107 TIME OUT ERROR No response was received within a specified period after the
PC issued an instruction. Check the destinations power
source, settings, cable connections and parameters (baud
rateand stop bit), and whetherthe contents of CONFIGSYS
are valid.
L:E-3108 ACCESS CANCELED Access has been interrupted.
L:E-3109 FILE-ROM UNMATCH ERROR The tile contents do not match the ROM data. ,
L:E-3110 CONTROL CODE ERROR The control code is invalid.
L:E-3120 FIRST RECORD INFORMATION The contents of the first record are invalid.
ERROR
L:E-3121 ROM DATA CANT CONDENSE The ROM data cannot be comoressed.
ERROR
L:E-3122 PART OF ROM DATA INVALID The ROM file data is invalid.
L:E-3123 ROM FILE > ROM ERROR The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.
L:E-3124 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E-3125 ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.
FILE
L:E-3126 ROM COUNT ERROR The ROM count is invalid.
L:E-3150 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The ROM file cannot be opened.
L:E-3151 WORK FILE OPEN ERROR The work file cannot be opened.
L:E-3152 WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR The work file cannot be initialized.
L:E-3153 WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR The work file cannot be closed.
L:E-3154 S RECORD FORMAT ERROR The S record format is invalid.
L:E-3155 WORK FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.
L:E-3156 WORK FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the work file.
L:E-3157 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file.
L:E-3158 WORK FILE READ ERROR The work file cannot be read.
L:E-3159 ROM FILE READ ERROR The ROM file cannot be read.
L:E-3160 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E-3180 ROM SET ERROR The EROM is mounted improperly.
L:E-3181 DIAGNOSIS ERROR An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.
L:E-3182 EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR The EROM is faulty.
L:E-3183 COMPARE ERROR The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.
L:E-3184 DATA FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.
L:E-3185 BLANK CHECK ERROR The EROM is not yet deleted.
L:E-3186 DATA SEND ERROR The number of data items is invalid.

-278-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number 1 Mewage I Contents I

L:E-3187 PARITY ERROR A parity error occurred during data transmission.
L:E-3188 ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED The writer is in use.
L:E-3189 ROM TYPE ERROR The ROM type is invalid.
L:E-3190 COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = ,
INPUT DATA = . FILE DATA =
L:E-3191 FL10 _ATDAT FILE FORMAT The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.
ERROR. HIT ANY KEY. I
L:E-3192 MEMORY CARD ERROR An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
L:E-3193 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
PARAMETER
L:E-3194 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format con-
I version is invalid. I
L:E-3195 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format
conversion.
L:E-3196 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format con-
version is invalid.
L:E-3197 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that can per-
form memory card format conversion.
L:E-3198 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid
CASSEl-TE SIZE) (the count falls outside the allowable range).
L:E-3199 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid
FILE SIZE) (the file size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E-3200 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting tile cannot be read.
L:E-3201 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E-3202 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.
L:E-3203 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E-3204 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate
memory card format conversion.
L:E-3205 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format
conversion.
L:E-3206 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.
L:E-3207 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be
opened.
L:E-3208 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for
I memory card format conversion. I
L:E-3209 1PMC TYPE I/O ERROR 1An I/O error occurred for the machine model settina file. 1
L:E-3210 BREAK PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an l/O
operation. I
L:E-3211 IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.
L:E-3212 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E-3213 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.
L:E-3214 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
-I
L:E-3215 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E-3216 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT The source file for which format conversion is to be per-
FILE formed does not exist.
L:E-3217 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid
ROM SIZE) (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). I
L:E-3218 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be obtained.
L:E-3219 1FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.
L:E-3220 1DATA SEEK ERROR

-279-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED

(COULD NOT FILD COMMAND interpreter is not found).

INTERPRETER

-280-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number MeJ=s((e Contents

L:E-3336 INVALID X PARAMETER IN TEXT X Parameter in the text file is invalid.
FILE
L:E-3339 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed.
L:E-3340 I==;T INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE The port has been successfully initialized.

L:E-3341 ;;;;;RARY FILE FORMAT The temporary file format is invalid.

L:E-3342 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).
FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)
L:E-3343 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not
FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE) found).
L:E-3344 UNKNOWN PMC TYPE The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.
LIE-3345 PORT INITIALIZE ERROR Port initialization failed.
L:E-3350 PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status
check).
L:E-3351 PORT ERROR(PARTY) A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port status
check).
L:E-3352 PORT ERROR(FRAMING) A framing error occurred (detected by the l/O portstatus
check).
L:E-3353 PORT ERROR A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the l/O port sta-
(BREAK INTERRUPT) tus check).
L:E-3354 PORT ERROR A time out error occurred (detected by the l/O port status
(TIME OUT) check).
L:E-3355 PORT ERROR A data transmission error occurred (detected by the l/O port
(DATA OUTPUT) status check).
L:E-3356 TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file
(FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section of
FLIO_AT.DAT.
L:E-3400 ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. - Unpermitted character is used in specified program name.
- The program name is over 8 characters.
L:E-3401 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS Forrnat-AIB source program is specified. Specify F0mat-C
DIFFERENT. source program.
L:E-3402 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.
L:E-3403 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. Specified source programs PMC type is unknown.
L:E-3404 XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT Specified directory for backup does not exist.
EXIST.
L:E-3500 NOT EXIST XxXx FILE. File xxxx does not exist.
L:E-3501 pLRf;ARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.

L:E-3502 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.
LABEL NAME ERROR
L:E-3503 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.
L:E-3504 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.
L:E-3505 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file for which format conversion is to be per-
ERROR formed cannot be opened.
L:E-3506 ;;;;RT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file for source file conversion cannot be
opened.
L:E-3507 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN The numberof parameters specified in the data file is invalid.
DATA FILE
L:E-3508 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
L:E-3509 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.

-281-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

1 Number 1 Mesaage Contents

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.

L:E-3511 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E-3512 E;;;kRT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.

I L:E-3513 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE

ERROR I
Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E3514 DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST The data file does not exist.
L:E-3515 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

I L:E-3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue pro-
cessing.
L:E-3600 NOT EXIST XXXX FILE. File xxxx does not exist.
L:E-3601 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.
ERROR
L:E-3602 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.
LABEL NAME ERROR
1 L:E-3603 ( DATA FILE OPEN ERROR 1The data file cannot be opened.
L:E-3604 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.
L:E-3605 EE;;pT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file cannot be opened.

L:E-3696 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file cannot be opened.
ERROR
L:E-3607 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.
DATA FILE
L:E-3608 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
1 L:E-3609 1INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION 1The contents of the data file are invalid.
L:E-3610 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.
ERROR
L:E-3611 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.
L:E-3612 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.
ERROR
L:E-3613 EE;;p OBJECT FILE WRITE Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E-3614 DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST The data file does not exist.
L:E-3615 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

I L:E-3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue pro-
cessing.

I L:E-3617 SUM CHECK ERROR OF S

RECORD
The S record check sum is erroneous.

L:E-3618 rFORMAT ERROR OF SO RECORD 1The SO record format is invalid.

L:E-3619 1PMC TYPE CODE ERROR ( The machine model code for the SO record is invalid.
L:E-3620 DATA CONVERT ERROR A data conversion error occurred.
L:E-3621 FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD ) The S record format is invalid.
L:E-3622 PMC ADDRESS ERROR The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable
range.
L:E-3700 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
PARAMETER
L:E-3701 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format con-
version is invalid.
L:E-3702 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card fonat
conversion.

-282-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Messaurge Contents

L:E-3703 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format con-
version is invalid.
L:E-3704 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that supports
memory card format conversion.
L:E-3705 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid
(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) (the count falls outside the allowable range).
L:E-3766 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid
(OUT OF FILE SIZE) (the file size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E-3707 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.
L:E-3708 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E-3709 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.
L:E-3710 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E-3711 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate
memory card format conversion.
L:Ei3712 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format
conversion.
L:E-3713 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card fom?at conversion file cannot be created.
L:E-3714 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be
opened.
L:E-3715 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for
memory card format conversion.
L:E-3716 PMC TYPE l/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.
L:E-3717 BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O
operation.
L:E-3718 IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.
L:E-3719 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E-3720 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.
L:E-3721 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
L:E-3722 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E-3723 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT The source file for which format conversion is to be per-
FILE formed does not exist.
L:E-3724 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid
(OUT OF ROM SIZE) (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E-3725 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be determined.
L:E-3726 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.
L:E-3727 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section
L:E-3728 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.
L:E-3729 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.
L:E-3730 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.
L:E-3731 DATA MAX OVER The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.
L:E-3732 $-TEA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM Execution cannot be continued because the data size i:
smaller than that of the count.
L:E-3733 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY The size of the memory card data section is invalid.
CARD
L:E-3734 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data i:
invalid).
L:E-3735 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E-3736 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E-3737 PARAMETER ERROR There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).
(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

-283-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.12.2 Warning

Number Message Content8

L:W4100 ROM PARITY WARING OF
APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TO
TRANSFER? (Y/N)
L:W4101 ROM PARITY WARING OF
APPOINT FILE I
L:W4102 XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is I
DIFFERENT PMC TYPE. same.
L:W4200 * NORMAL END Processing ended normally.
L:W4201 * D _PROGOPT -DRAM UNMATCH The DRAM does not match.
L:W4202 * PARITY UNMATCH The parity does not match.
L:W4203 * CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX Cassette size = xxxx
L:W4204 * ROM COUNT = XXXX ROM count = xxxx
~~~~I~~;~~IE~~~YT&THE j The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.

L:W4206 * ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.
ROM COUNT SIZE
L:W4207 * ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.
(XXXX BYTE)

-284-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.13 N : ON-LINE MONITOR

5.13.1 Error

Number Message Contents

N:E-3001 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR
N:E-3003 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F-ROM is faulty.
Replace the F-ROM.
Contact FANUC Service.
N:E-3006 FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program is greater than that of
F-ROM.
Increase the size of F-ROM.
Try using the off-fine CONDENSE function.
N:E-3007 FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop status.
Set the CNC to emergency stop status.
N:E-3008 ;fz%RROM PROGRAM DATA The PMC sequence program has failed.
Input the sequence program again.
N:E-3030 LADDER SIZE ERROR The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC.
Check the size of the sequence program.
N:E-3031 PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RAl). When the PMC control module type is RAl , on-line editing
cannot be performed.
N:E-3036 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program exceeds the option-spe-
(OPTION). cified size.
Reduce the size of the sequence program.
N:E-3037 PMC TYPE UNMATCH. The PMC type is invalid.
Convert the machine model using the off-line function.
N:E-3038 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP). The ladder step number option does not exist.
N:E-3041 THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS Communication with the PMC has not been established.
NOT READY. Start communication with the PMC.
N:E-3042 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm.
Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.
N:E-3045 LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC) The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to
ERROR STATUS = nn the PMC.
Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E-3046 THE PROGRAM IS NOT The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
CORRESPONDING (PMC). STA- Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the
TUS=NN PMC program.
N:E-3947 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is
ERROR STATUS = nn issued.
Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.
N:E-3048 LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC) The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
ERROR STATUS = nn Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the
PMC program.
N:E-3050 INPUT INVALID An invalid value has been entered.
Enter a valid value.
N:E-3051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program is full.
Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E-3054 COM FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the COM (SUBS) functional instruction is
invalid.
Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is
valid.
N:E-3055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the JMP (SUBlO) functional instruction is
invalid.
Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUBBO) is
valid.

-285-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

N:E-3056 END FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the ENDl, END2, END3. and END functional
instructions is invalid.
Check whether these instructions have been entered in the
correct order.
N:E-3056 LADDER BROKEN Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has
failed.
Input the ladder program again.
N:E-3660 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions
is invalid.
Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a
subprogram.
N:E-3061 COM FUNCTION MISSING TheCALLorCALLUfun&malinsbu&nissper%edbetween
(CALLSP) the COM (SUB9) and COME functionalinstructions.
Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.
N:E-3062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP) Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB1 0) func-
tional instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.
N:E-3063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.
N:E-3064 SP NO. DUPLICATE The specified subprogram number already exists. .
Specify another subprogram number.
N:E-3065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING No subprogram exists.
Create a subprogram.
N:E-3066 END FUNCTION NOTHING The END functional instruction does not exist.
Enter the END functional instruction.
N:E-3066 LBL COUNT OVER The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum.
Reduce the number of labels.
N:E-3069 LBL NO. DUPLICATE The specified label number is already in use.
Specify another label number.
N:E-3070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does noi
exist.
Enter the LBL functional instruction.
N:E-3071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB) The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the
COM and COME functional instructions. This instruction
cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and
COME.
Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enterthe
LBL functional instruction, together with JMPB, betweenI
COM and COME.
N:E-3072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING The JMPB inskuctioncannotjump to other than a subprogram.
Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.
N:E-3073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does noiI
exist.
Enter the LBL functional instruction.
N:E-3074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) The specified LBL functional instruction is specifiec
between COM and COME. This instruction cannot be usec
to perform a jump from between COM and COME.
Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the
JMPC functional instruction, together with LBL. behveer
COM and COME.
N:E-3075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than 2
subprogram.
Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.
N:E-3076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists ir1
a level other than the second ladder level.
Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladde r
level.
-

-286
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number 1 Message Contents

N:E-3077 SYMBOL UNDEFINE The entered symbol is not yet defined.
Enter a valid symbol name.
N:E-3080 LADDER ILLEGAL The ladder program is invalid.
Input the ladder program again.
N:E-3082 ILLEGAL OPERATION An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was
made to create a relay or coil in a functional instruction).
Be careful to specify operations correctly.
N:E-3084 DATA TABLE COUNT OVER The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum.
Reduce the number of data tables.
N:E-3085 EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be
performed. Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E-3090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil exists.
Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.
N:E-3691 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The specified address is not found.
Check the specified address.
N:E-3092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal lines of the net are not connected.
Connect the horizontal lines.
N:E3093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL Them is an invalii connectionbetween funckonalinstmcticns.
Ensure that the connections between functional instructions
are specified correctly.
N:E-3094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING No relay or coil exists.
Add a relay or coil.
N:E-3095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL The vertical lines of the net are not connected.
Connect the vertical lines.
N:E-3096 PARAMETER NOTHING No parameters are specified for a functional instruction.
Specify the required parameters.
N:E-3097 ADDRESS NOT DETECTED No address is specified.
Specify an address.
N:E-3100 NET TOO LARGE The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer.
Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E-3102 LARGE NET APPEARED The net is too large to be displayed.
Reduce the size of the net.
N:E-3111 ERROR NET FOUND An invalid net exists.
Correct the invalid net.
N:E-3113 FUNCTION NOT FOUND The specified functional instruction is not found.
Check the number of the functional instruction.
N:E-3114 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO Search for a functional instruction has been performed using
the wrong number.
Check the number specified for the functional instruction.
N:E-3123 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The MCARD file cannot be opened.
ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered cor-
rectly. Alternatively, the MCARD file may have been
destroyed.
N:E-3124 SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR The symbol file cannot be opened.
ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered cor-
rectly.
Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.
N:E-3125 ROM FILE READ ERROR The MCARD file cannot be read.
ERROR STATUS = nn The MCARD file may have been destroyed.
N:E-3126 ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) An error occurred when reading data from extended
ERROR STATUS = nn memory.
Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.

-287-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

1 Number 1 Message Contents

IU:E-3130 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the

I
NOT ENOUGH MEMORY
IU:E-3131 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR
ERROR STATUS = nn
IU:E-3132 NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR
ERROR STATUS = nn
MCARD file.
Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.
Data cannot be written to the MCARD file.
Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the
name of the program to be saved.
The net comment file cannot be opened.
Check whether the program name has been entered cor-
rectly.
Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

L
IV:E-3140 FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR There is insufficient memory.
DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Reserve an area in conventional memory.
V:E-3141 FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA An error occurred while reading data table control data from
TABLE CONTROL DATA. the PMC.
Check the connection with the PMC and whether the speci-
fied machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
Y:E-3142 FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA An error occurred while writing data table control data to the
TABLE CONTROL DATA. PMC.
Check the connection with the PMC and whether the speci-
fied machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
N:E-3143 THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS An attempt was made to change a value in a data table
WRITE-PROTECTED. group, but that data table group is writ+protected.
First, checkwhetherthe correct data table group is specified,
then set that data table group to write-enabled status.
N:E-3144 ADDRESS NOT FOUND. The specified address is not found.
Check whether the address is specified correctly.
N:E-3150 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder dia-
BEEN MODIFIED. gram when it had not been modified.
N:E-3151 AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LAD- An error occurred in the ladder diagram.
DER DIAGRAM. The system cannot switch to update or monitor.
Correct the error in the diagram.
N:E-3153 TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR. There is insuft icient memory.
NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.
MEMORY
N:E-3155 PROGRAM READ ERROR. There is insufficient memory.
NOTENOUGHPROGRAM Reserve an area in conventional memory.
MEMORY
N:E-3158 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the
MODIFIED. ladder diagram has been modified.
Update the ladder diagram.
N:E-3160 ;;K;TF!JHI PROGRAM IS The specified program does not match that in the PMC
memory.
Specify the correct program, or load or store the program
such that it matches the PMC memory program.
N:E-3161 TRANSFER WAS ABORTED. The user has canceled the transfer.
If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC
memory may be destroyed. Store the program again to load
it into the PMC.
If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is.
If the program does not match that in PMC memory, load or
store the program such that it matches the PMC memory
program.
N:E-3162 NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. Communication with the PMC has not yet been established.
CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM. Set up communication with the PMC.
N:E-3163 MISMATCH PASSWORD The entered password is invalid.
Enter a valid password.

-288-
 5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

N:E-3164 TOO LARGE PROGRAM. The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC
NOT ENOUGH PMCS PROGRAM program memory.
MEMORY Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC pro-
gram memory.
N:E-3167 INVALID PROGRAM NAME. The program name is invalid.
Check the program name.
N:E-3170 CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER. The specified range is too great.
Specify a narrower range.
N:E-3171 CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory.
ERROR. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional
memory, or on disk.
N:E-3172 NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn). When nn = 1:
There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional
memory, or on disk.
When nn = 2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off-tine function.
N:E-3173 NET COMMENT COPY ERROR Whennn=l:
(nn). There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional
memory, or on disk.
When nn = 2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off-line function.
N:E-3174 NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR Whennn=l:
(nn). There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional
memory, or on disk.
When nn = 2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off-line function.
N:E-3175 NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.
Check the net comments using the off-line function.
N:E-3176 NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.
Check the net comments using the off-tine function.
N:E-3177 NET COMMENT DATA WRITE The net comment file contains erroneous data.
ERROR. Check the net comments using the off-line function.
N:E-3178 NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA. The net comment file contains no net comment within the
specified range.
Check the net comments using the off-line function.
N:E-3183 THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED. - On-line editing function and l/O menu functions are pro-
tected. Confirm keep relay.
- Data table control data screen is protected. Confinn keep
relay.
N:E-3184 WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE PMC parameter is write protected.
NOR EMERGENCY STOP.) Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the se-
quence program.
N:E-3185 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.) PMC parameter is write protected.
Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or stop the sequence program.
N:E-3186 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE PMC parameter is write protected.
AND KEY4.) Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or set KEY4=1, or stop the se-
quence program.
N:E-3187 WRITE PROTECT. Signal status is write protected.
Confirm keep relay.

-289-
e
n
a
 APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND

DECOMPILATION

(1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilation

When [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selected from the initial menu, automatic
compilation or decompilation is performed according to the following conditions:

[Conditions/results]
The start conditions are determined from the results of companng the time stamps of the
CONTOL and MCARD files for the source program. The conditions under which these files
are updated and the results of updating are described below.

[File updating conditions]

0 CONTOL file
The CONTOL file is updated once the source program has been modified by using the off-
line editing function.

@ MCARD file
The MCARD file is updated once the source program has been input by using the off-line
input/output function (for example, after being transferred from the PMC or converted from
a memory-card or Handy-File format file), or once processing has been terminated after
modifying the ladder program by using the on-line function.

[Results]
0 When the CONTOL file has the most recent time stamp
+ Automatic compilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]
When no compilation is performed after the program is edited by using the off-line
function
etc

Q) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp
+ Automatic decompilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]
When no decompilation is performed after the program is transferred from the PMC by
using the off-line input;output function
When processing is terminated after the ladder program is edited by using the on-line
function
etc

in) When both files have the same time stamp

* Automatic start processing is not performed.

Al-l
 APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

[Applicable cases]
. When comprlation is performed after the program is edited by using the off-line function
. etc

(Note) The options applied to automatic compilation or decompilation, started under the above
conditions, are those specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of the off-line
function. Before attempting to select [ON-LINE FUNCTION], confirm the set options.
For details of how to set options, see Section 4.5.7.

Al -2
 APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE Oh%% FLSET. CNF.

%%%FLSET.CNF is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior
of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there.
The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed.
And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.

(Note) %%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used to determine system operation. If data
in this file is not modified correctly, the functions described in this manual may not be
performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attempt to modify any data other than the items
described below.

(1) Sample of %%%FLSET.CNF

;=======================I==============================================

; FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

; ( 'key word =' <= 9characters )
,.============r==============IPI-PIIPrPII=============================
I

lv; ======== System information ======E=

.
ierl=AOBB-9201-J503 Version 01.0;
rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991-1995 FANUC LTD.:
lS: ======== System Setup ======E

editor =*, Text Editor

,
ladkey = 1; Ladder editing key buffer size
; ( 1 <= ladkey <= 16 )

1:Check symbol
(level-l) for IEC standard
2:No check
I

lU: ======== Utility Information =======

4 = UTILITY; Utility Guidance

,
Fl = DOS / command.com; [Fl] Soft Key Guidance 61 EXE
F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; [FZ] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; [F3] Soft Key Guidance h EXE
F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr-pf103400b.tbl; [F4] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F5 =* [F5] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F6 =I [F6] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F7 =; [F7] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F8 =; [FE] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
F9 =* [F9] Soft Key Guidance h EXE
FlO=; [FlO] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE
:
[EOF]

A2 - 1
 APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

(2) Registering a command in the utility

(a) Function
A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the [UTILITY] function on the
initial or off-line menu.=

(b) Key word

11
Items F5 = to FlO = are displayed under IJ; Utility Information
For these items, describe the tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify
currently displayed characters, such as V and F5 =. If such a character is modified, the
system does not recognize the assignment.

(c) Format

Tool name displayed on the utility screen

Characters to the right of : are assumed to be a comment.

w [Fl ] Soft key Guidance & EXE

Delimiter belween displayed name and command

Function key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters which can be used to specify the tool name and
registered tool are as follows:
. Tool name : 70 characters (or 35 double-byte characters)
. Registered tool : 40 characters

AZ-2
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.1 Differences from FAPT LADDER

(1) Source program types

FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMAT-A, FORMAT-B, and FORMAT-C,
while FAPT LADDER-II supports only the FORMAT-C type.

I
Supported source program type
FAPT LADDER model
FORMAT-A FORMAT-B FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER (I(Note1) O(Note1) O(Note1)

FAPT LADDER-II X X 0

(Note 1) The supported source program types also vary with the PMC model. For details, refer
to the relevant FAPT LADDER manual.

SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT-C

0 FORMAT-C
This source program type is used on FAPT LADDER-II.
The FORMAT-C source program is organized by below files.

c A case of specifying C: y DATA-Y PRG - C as source program >

c: tc
data y

PRG Cy
-CONTROL Source program managing file
SYSPARAM System parameter data file
h . TITLE Title data file
XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file (Note 1)
MESSAGE Message data file
IOMODULE l/O Module data file
LEVEL1 .#LA First level ladder data file
LEVEL2.#LA Second level ladder data file
LEVEL3.#LA Third level ladder data file (Note 2)
Pyyy.#LA Sub-program ladder data file (Note 3)
Pzzz.#SS Sub-program step sequence data file (Note 3)
NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file (Note 1)
OPTION Setting of option
-. MCARD Memory card format file

(Notel) xxxis number of multr file managrng.

(Note2) Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMC-RC4RC4(STEP).
(Note3) yyy, IZZ is number of sub-program.

A3 - 1
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

0 FORMAT-A
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
The source program is managed using the following names. A single directory can contain
two or more source programs.

- xxxxxxxx.#CN : Ftle managtng user programs

- xxxxxxxx.#PA : File storing system parameters
- xxxxxxxx.#TA : File storing the title data
- xxxxxxxx.#SY : File storing symbols
-xxxxxxxx.#c1 : File storing comments
- xxxxxxxx.#C2 : File storing comments (reserve)
- xxxxxxxx.#ME : File storing messages
- xxxxxxxx.#l0 : File storing the I10 module data
- xxxxxxxx.#LA : File storing ladder

(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)

0 FORMAT-B
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
A directory is created with the specified source program name. In the directory, the
program is managed under the following names. A single directory cannot contain two or
more source programs.

- CONTROL : Ftle managing the source program

- SYSPARAM File storing system parameters
- TITLE File storing the title data
- SYMBOL File storing symbols
- COMMENT1 File storing comments
- COMMENT2 File stonng comments (reserve)
- MESSAGE File storing messages
- IOMODULE File storing the I10 module data
- LEVEL1 .#LA File storing ladder of the first level
LEVEL2.#LA File storing ladder of the second level
- LEVELX#LA File storing ladder of the third level

- PYYYYY.#LA File storing ladder subprograms

- PYYYYY.#SS File storing step sequence subprograms

(yyyyy IS a subprogram number.)

143-2
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files. FAPT LADDER-II, however, does not use
ROM format files because an object file called an MCARD file (memory-card format file) is
added to the source program. The data flow is outlined below.
Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of ROM format files. FAPT
LADDER-II. however, does not require the input of ROM format files.

(a) FAPT LADDER

External devices

CNC
Memory-card format file
Handy-File format file

0 Compile @ Decompile
@ Output (in ROM format) @I Input (in ROM format)

(b) FAPT LADDER-II

External devices

CNC
Memory-card format file
Handy-File format file

m Compile @I Decompile
(3 Output (In object format) @I Input (in object format)

3.2 Conversion from FAPT LADDER

Because FAPT LADDER-II supports only FORMAT-C source files and does not support ROM
format files, the following files must be converted before they can be used with FAPT LADDER-II.

Source file of other than the FORMAT-C type

ROM format file

Programs developed for use with FAPT LADDER can be converted for use with FAPT LADDER-II,
by applying any of the following methods:

(1) Conversion to a mnemonic file

A FAPT LADDER program can be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first converting
It to a mnemonic file.

A3-3
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Convert a program to a mnemonic file, using the FAPT LADDER mnemonic editing function,
then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(2) Conversion to a memory-card format file

A FAPT LADDER program can also be converted to a FAPT LADDER-If program by first
converting it to a memory-card format file.
Convert a program to a memory-card format fde, using [MEMORY CARD] of the FAPT
LADDER. input/output function then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(3) Conversion to a FORMAT-C source file

A FAPT LADDER program can also be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first
converting it to a FORMAT-C source file.
Some FAPT LADDER models support FORMAT-C source files. Convert the source file type to
FORMAT-C, then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(4) Conversion of a ROM format file

FAPT LADDER-II can convert a ROM format file to a memory-card format file, as follows:

(a) Operation

0 Select [OFF-LINE FUNCTION] from the initial menu, then select F6 (I/O]. The [l/O]
screen appears.

@ Press the c F9> key on the (I.01 screen. The II/O (ROM FILE)] screen appears.

(Note) No item corresponding to the < F9> key is displayed on the [l/O screen.) The <F9>
key is, however, effective.

(@I Selecttng F2 [READ] displays the II0 (ROM FILE > MCARDI screen. Enter the
ROM file and rnemory card file names, then convert the file.

A3-4
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Fl KEY WRITE ( Menory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F2 KEY RERO ! Uemory Card c- ROM FORMfllFILE 1

Fig. 6.3.2 (a)

3.3 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to
another type of it.

3.3.1 Converting by system parameter editing

On the following PMC type, it IS possible to edit the different PMC type data by changing system
parameter of the mnemonrc data.
However, format of the system parameter. usable functional instructions and range of address are
different.

CNC TYPE PMC TYPE

Power Mate-MODEL D PMC-PA1 IPA3

FS IS-MODEL B PMC-NB/NB2

[Example: PMC-RB + PMCRC3]

(1) Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert the original source program to mnemonic file.
(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMC-RC3 with a standard text editor.
(3) Set the PMC type to PMC-RC3 on FAPT LADDER system and convert the mnemonic
frle( -+(2)) to source program.

A3 - 5
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Original file (PMC-RB) Converted file (PMCRC3)

%@A %@A
%@O %@O
2 BCD 2 BCD
Change
3 NO system parameter 3 NO
4 PMC-RB 1 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
%@l %
01 ABC-KIKAI %@l
02 S-DRILL 01 ABC-KIKAI
02 S-DRILL

%
%@5 %
x000 1 0 1 ID16C %@5
YO08 1 0 4 OD32A x000 1 0 1 IDlCC
% YO08 1 0 4 OD32A
%@E %
%@E

3.3.2 Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER
APPLICABLE PMCCNC TYPE REFERENCE MATERIALS
FILE NAME

FSOT CNV.SYM PMC-LjMIM(MMC) -+ PMCRAlIRA2IRAYRB FANUC PMC

-
(FSO-T) lRB2/RB3RB4RB5 PROGRAMMING MANUAL
RBG/RC/RC3/RC4
(LADDER LANGUAGE)
(FS16118/20-T)
B-61 863E
FSnM CNV.SYM PMC-LMIM(MMC) + PMCRAlRA2IRA3IRB
-
(FSO-M) lRB2/RB3/RB4/RB51
RBG/RCRC3/RC4
(FS16/18/20-M)

PM-C - CNV.SYM PMC-P + PAliPA3

(Power Mate (Power Mate
-MODEL C) -MODEL DFH)

(Note) The converter file is stored in the drrectory APPENDIX of module system floppy disk (Vol.

5).

A3-6
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

[Example: PMC-P -+ PMC-PA 1

(1) Set PMC type to PMC-P. and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.)
(2) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit
mode without editing the ladder program.

(3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (-+B.)

(4) Quit FAPT LADDER. and actrvate any standard text editor.
(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.)

(5) Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file
(PM-CCNV). (-C.)

(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of the original
mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.)

(7) Complete the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER.

(8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. and convert the mnemonic file(5) to source program.

(9) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data.

Convert file
PM-C - CNV.SYM

%@2
A. Original file G0004.3 G68.3
(PMC-P) G0005.0 G95.0
%@A 60005.2 G95.2
%@O 60005.3 G95.3
B. Converted file
1 2048 60005.6 683.7
(PMC-PAl)
% G0006.2 G75.2
%@A
%@l G0006.4 G74.4
% G0007.2 668.2 %@O
2 BINARY
%@2 60007.5 684.5
3 NO
%
4 PMC-PA1
%@3
%
RD X21.4 X1027.4 X23.4
WRT 6121.4 X1027.5 X23.5 %@l

RD.NOT X22.3 X1027.6 X23.6 %

WRT.NOT 6122.3 X1027.7 X23.7 %@2

%
SUB 1 %
D. insertron %@3
SUB 2
, c
WRT G121.4 %

RD.NOT X22.3 %@4

WRT.NOT 6122.3 %

SUB 1 %@5
%
SUB 2
b@E
b
b@E

A3-7
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.3.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol 8 comment, ladder, message, and 110 module data) in a sequence
program can be used for another sequence program, by the following method.

The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may have to be modified.
Refer to the programming manual of the respective models.

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A %@A
%@O %@O
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC-RB 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
%@l 9 YES
%
%@l
%@2
x000.0 2PX.M
Insert
x000.1 2PY.M %@2
% ;I-- x000.0 ZPX.M
x000.1 ZPY.M
%

%@E

Converting a step sequence program according to the model

Usually, mnemonics are used to convert a ladder program according to the model.
However, a ROM ftle is used only when a step sequence program for the PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) is
converted for the PMCRC4(STEP SEC).
The operation, by which the source program C: f DATA Y SAMPLER6 is converted to the source
program C: Y DATA f SAMPLERC. is described as follows.

[Procedure]
Compile the step sequence program C: f DATAY SAMPLERB for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)
and create a object file. (Create C: Y DATAY SAMPLERB. MEM)

Create the new source program C: Y DATA? SAMPLERC.

The name of object file, which is creattng by (1.1, is change as follows from command line.

C: y > RENAME C: -Y DATA Y SAMPLERB C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

A3-8
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

(;ii Select C: 7 DATA SLSAMPLERC from the select source program screen.

@ Select F4 (DECOMPILE) from the offline menu.

The program is converted. The step sequence program read into FAPT LADDER can be used for
the PMCRC4(STEP SEQ).

3.3.4 Convert step sequence program from/to another PMC type

For converting a ladder program, a mnimonic file is genelally used. But for converting a step
sequence program: PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) + PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ), an object file is suitable.
This is the example of converting operation,
from source program C: Y DATAY SAMPLERB : PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)
to source program C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC : PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ).

[Operation ]
0 Compile the step sequence program C: Y DATAY SAMPLERB and generate the object file.
(C: Y DATA y SAMPLERB. MEM is generated.)

0 Make new source program, C: Y DATAY SAMPLERC.

(Set PMC type to PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ).)

01 Change the object file name @ as DOS prompt as below.

1C: v > RENAME C: M DATAY SAMPLERB C: Y DATAY SAMPLE% 1

@ Select C: Y DATAY SAMPLERC at Program selection.

@J Select F4 key (Decompile).

And the step sequence program C:Y DATAY SAMPLERC is now available for PMC-RC4 (STEP
SEQ.

3.4 Transfer From P-G

3.4.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC

This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P-G (including the
Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable. [FLOADAT] is for IBM PC/AT.

A3-9
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.1 Command input during startup

(1) Uploading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing uploaded data] _ -u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data already exists in the
current directory. the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

(2) Downloading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.
I

FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing downloaded data] _ -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following two parameters:
-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC.
-d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note) The above parameters can be specified with either lowercase or uppercase characters.

3.4.1.2 Communications settings

PC side
IBM PCAT senes MODE COMl: 4800,E.7,2
(PC DOS MODE command) MODE COMl: 9600,E,7.2 (for 9600 baud)

P-G side
IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG
IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG,BRlO (for 9600 baud)

(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However, note that when the PC
baud rate is set to 9600. the parameter BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting
for the P-G.
(Note 2) It is necessary to set these communications setting only for doing this operation. After
using this function, please restore the communications settings as the section 2.1
(Chapter 1).

The CN number is not fixed. For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from
CNl to CN4. For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl to CN3. However,
note that the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO command. Use the
cables specified in Appendix 8.

A3-10
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Operation example
During uploading

OperalIon procedure Example of input and screen contents

-z PC > < PG z= Turn on power.

< PG > Enter IO command settings. ; IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG(,BRlO)
< PC > IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE i (See Section 2 of Communications
command settings. i Settings)
< PG > Store transmission data in P-G memory. : Press the [F2] key to select menu item
: no.2.

; FLOADAT FILENAME -u
< PC > Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting slate. : < PC > LOADER START is displayed.

< PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu. !

< PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the
submenu.
Beglns transmission. ; < PG > EXECUTING is displayed.
Zompletes transmission.
-z PG > Returns to the menu. i < PC > Operation Complete is displayed.
< PC > The message Operation Complete is j HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
displayed, followed by the prompt HIT j
ANY KEY. Hit any key to end operation. :

During downloading

Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

c PC > < PG > Turn on power.

c PG > Enter IO command settings. ; IO NC,CNl ,(BRlO,)Fl ,F6
-z PC > IBM PC/AT series : Enter MODE i (See Section 2 of Communications
command setting _ Settings)
<PG > Turn on [Fl] key. Select no.2 on the i c PG > EXECUTING is displayed.
menu. Enters waiting state.
c PC > Execute FLOADAT.
; FLOADAT FILENAME -d
3egins transmission. : -c PC > Output Start is displayed.
Zompletes transmission.
< PG > Returns to the menu.
-z PC > The message Operation Complete IS -ZPC > Operation Complete is displayed.
displayed, followed by the prompt HIT j HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
ANY KEY. Hit any key to end operation.

A3-11
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.3 Protocol

Durinq uploadinq
When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a communications request is
issued for the P-G and reception begins. After all data has been received, DC 3 is sent and
transmission is completed.

0 DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmlssion request).

0 Data is received.
(Z$J Completion code is received and reception is completed.
@ DC 3 code is sent.

Transmisston and reception both use the l-byte machlne-dependent BIOS call for input and
output.

Durinq downloading
After the P-G issues a transmission request, the P-G enters the waiting state. FLOADAT is
activated in the PC, then transmission begins. After all data has been sent, DC 4 is sent and
transmission is completed.

0 The P-G issues DC 1.

8 DC 2 code is sent to the P-G
0 Data is sent.
@I DC 4 code is sent.

Transmlsslon and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent BIOS call for input and
output.

3.4.1.4 BUSY control

When the transmtsslon speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY control is performed by
issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which
effectively has the same resull.

A3-12
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system WIII automatrcally determine which of the following seven pairs of start and end codes
is used. When none of these codes are used, an error message is displayed and operation
terminates.

(Note) The end codes

shown here must appear at
the beginning of a line. In
other words, strictly speaking,
a data reception end code is
actually denoted by the
sequence CR + LF + an end
code. End codes (% etc.)
appearing within comments
are ignored.

3.4.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR
(ODH) followed by LF (OAH).

(2) When a CR code (ODH) IS recerved, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) IS received, CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended to it in that order.

3.4.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

- Discarded I Valid data -

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for uploading or DC 4 is sent for
downloading, then the file is closed.

A3-13
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.8 Error detection and messages

This software detects the following four types of errors.

(1) When there is an error in the command line

Error in the file name, -u. or -d.

Parameter Error
FLOADAT FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

(2) When the specified file cannot be found

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

Cannot open output file

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received

Wrong data received

I .

(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected

or there is a definite problem with the end code

IEnd code error detected I

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT LADDER format.
This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT LADDER data.

Messaqes

When the file name specified as the file for receivrng data already exists in the current directory,
the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <YIN >

A3 - 14
 APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.9 Error detection and handling

1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.

3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The followrng causes can be considered for the above errors:

l The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).

l The start code has been omitted (%@, where l is A or 0 to 5. was omitted)
l Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.
l Garbage data exists between each unit of data.
l The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.

When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is canceled.

During downloadrng, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will return to the DOS
screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return rt to the
menu screen.

4. Others

l When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted

(When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)

When data transfer is interrupted during uploadrng, the system will enter a waiting state until
data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the waiting state, press -z CTRL > + <C >).
When data transfer is Interrupted during downloading, the data becomes corrupt and data
transfer must be started over from the beginning.

A3-15
 APPENDIX 4 STANDARD SYMBOL DATA

APPENDIX 4 STANDARD SYMBOL DATA

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the
standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE DATA FILE NAME

FS16/18-T F16&F18-T.SYM

FS16/18-M FiG&F18-M.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL D PM-D.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL H PM-H.SYM

(Note) The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of system floppy (Vol. 5).

A4-1
 APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data incorporating sequence
program of FANUC PMCs .
This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.
The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data, if both message data
size are the same.
This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For
example: Supporting multi-lingual message.)

< Method of Message size Check >

(1) Memory map information IS output when the source program is compiled.
Please check each symbol top address of the original changing ladder and the ladder for
changing to be the same value.

(2) This tool for changrng the message data execute with the compare file, then this tool
execute the same check of the message data size.

<Applied PMCs >

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3RB3RB4!RB5/RB6RC3/RC4INB/NB2

1. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING

(1 Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the.memory card or
floppy disk on the PMC input/output operation ([l/O] screen).

(2) Input the CHGMES command with the message data for changing and dummy ladder
file(handy file format).

(3) The message data on the NC is changed by loadtng the output file of this tool on the PMC
input/output operation (I l/O] screen).

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

It IS necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.

(1) Memory
235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating this function without FAPT
LADDER.

(2) Temporary files

This function generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which
is set by environmental variable TMP of PC-DOS.
This function generate temporary files on the route directory of current drive when
environmental variable IMP is not set.
It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for these temporary files.
$TMPD.T*, $TMPW.T* (n=oo-99)
(These temporary files are deleted by this functron automatically.)

A5 - 1
 APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

(3) Hard disk

It is necessary to use following disk space.
l For installation 68KBytes
l To generate temporary files 65KBytes
(In case of environmental variable TMP
of PC-DOS set on hard disk)

TOTAL 133KBytes

3. INSTALLATION

Please copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy
disk(Vol.3).
Key in * CHGMES on the Installed directory, then following files are generated.
CHGMESEXE . ASC2lMG.EXE . IMG2ASC.EXE : Execute files (. EXE)
RB3DtJMMY.SFM. RB3BASIC.SFM . RB3MES.SFM : example files(.SFM)
Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function by activating example
command.

4. ACTIVATION

Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main
menu).
Or,Please change the directory in whrch this tool is installed.
(It is not necessary to change the directory when the PATH is set.)
Then key in followrng command.

CHGMES [INPUT FILE j [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE] ( [COMPARE FILE] ) <return >
INPUT FILE : : A handy file format file that consists of a dummy ladder and message data
to replace the message data in the basic message ladder file.
Create this file by compiling the source file and converting to a handy file
format file using FAPT LADDER.
OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by this tool.
This file contains only message data.
By loading this file to the CNC, message data in the CNC memory can be
substituted.
PMC TYPE : : PMC TYPE (RAl or RAZ or RA3...etc.)
Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined c Applied PMCs > item.
Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs.
COMPARE FILE : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)
(Optional) Please refer to the Fig.Operation outline.
This tool compares message size of the INPUT FILE and the
COMPARE FILE to determine if there is a match. Then, you can
guarantee that only the message will be correctry replaced without
crashing other data when you load the OUTPUT FILE to CNC.

A5-2
 APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

< Outline of Operation >

Basic message ladder Message for changing + Dummy ladder

VI VI
t Generation, Editing -+

+ + Check the SYMBOL top

COMPILATION address by memory map
display.

I INPUT/OUTPUT (F4:FLOPPY CASSETTE Handy File) I

FLOPPY

lb (Note)
shanging

%l
1
CHGMES
to message

[In. file]

x2
ROM data(Using

[Out. file]
1x2
this function)
1
(pmc type] ([Camp. file])
%3

J FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

CNC
El: I
(Note)

Only message data for changing of ROM file

Loading at [l/O)screen operation of PMC.

(Note) It is possible to load by memory card only for FSlG-B, FS18-B, FS-20, FS21-B, and
FS15-B (PMC-NB).
Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory
card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.
FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PAYRAl!RA2.!RA3/RBiRB2/RB4iRCiRC3/RC4/NB
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863E/06)

A5-3
 APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

5. USING EXAMPLE

Check the installation of this function by using the following example.

There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking this function.

RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format)
(Message data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + ENDZ))
RB3BASIC.SFM : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)
(Message data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment data)
RB3MES.SFM : : Data for checking the result (Message data(5OKB))
(This file is a normal output file, when this tool execute for above
sample data. It is possible to check result by comparing OUTPUT
FILE and this file.)
Execute as the following (In this case the system is installed in marn
body.)

(1 Please key in the following command.

A: Iy > CHGMES RB3DUMMYSFM USERTEST.SFM RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return >
You can specify any name for OUTPUT FILE.ln this example,USERTEST.SFM is used.

(2) Following file is generated on current drive.

USERTEST.SFM (Message data (50KB))

(3) Check the result by using FC/A(PC-DOS COMMAND).

A: M > FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM
If NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED IS drsplayed. the result is correct.

6. ERROR MESSAGES

Message Meaning and countermeasure

chgmes : PMC type unmstch (pmc type) PMC type does not match between applied
PMCs.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file) PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do
not match.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file) PMC type of compare file and key in PMC
type do not match.

chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and Message size of input file and compare file do
(compare ftle) are mismatched not agree. Please adjust the message size by
adding some dummy message to the input
file. Please confirm the MAP display on the
compile function of FAPT LADDER.

chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG ASC2lMG.EXE does not exist in the same
directory of CHGMES.EXE.

A5-4
 APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

Message Meaning and countermeasure

chgmes : Cannol start IMG2ASC IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same
directory of CHGMES.EXE.

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file It is impossible to make temporary file.

$tmpd.t Disk is insufficient.
chgmes : Cannot make temporary file . It is impossible to set the file name, because
$tmwd.t $tmp.tOO -$tmp.t99 exist.

chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t Temporary file can not be closed.
Please check the dtsk space.

asc2img : Cannot allocate memory (bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB
or more memory, and re-activate.

asc2img : Conversion area in Input is Ladder header of the input file is crushed.
conflicted Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.

asc2img : Unknown file type Illegal format of the Input file. Please change
the format, and re-activate.

asc2img : (input file) : Record No.* has There is an invalid data of input file.
Please correct as error message, and
reactivate.

asc2lmg : Cannot open file There is no input file.

asc2img : Cannot close file It is impossible to close the file.

Please check the disk space.

asc2img : Cannot wnte It is impossible to write the temporary file.

Please check the disk space.

Img2asc : Cannot allocate memory (bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB
or more memory, and re-activate.

img2asc : Cannot wrote It IS impossible to write the output file.

Please check the disk space.

A5-5
 APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY
(FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY

(FOR THE PMGRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

If a CNC or off-line programmer operating on an upgraded edition is used to output a sequence

program to a memory card, the sequence program may not be able to be Input to a CNC or off-line
programmer operating on an earlier edition (see below).

Series 4080. edition 06

A08B-XXXX-J503. editions 01.1 and later

/
/
I
I
,
I

/ , I
.&
,
: ,. .,

-, II
.,

Series 4080, editron 04

Series 4047, edition 01
Series 4054, edition 01

CNC

: Operating on an upgraded edrtion

-f- - : Unconditionally possible

+ -- - - - - -) : Possible under some condition

: Operating on an earlier edition

Cases ii) and (5) where input.output is possible under some condition, are explained below.

l Cases 0) and (?!

output : No special operatton IS required.
Input : Use the BOOT SYSTEM to enter a sequence program

A6-1
 APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.1

0 SMARTDRV.EXE
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following:
Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE

Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a command line of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

Wwtoml
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, the following symptom occurs.
l The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling
entry.
Alarm message : Received data Invalid (for the PC-9801)
OVERRUN (for the IBM/PC and compatible)

[Measure]
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:

a. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists

b. Drive where ROM format files are created

Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A, and a ROM format file is to be
created on drive B
SMARTDRV a b + disable write caching for drives A and B

Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3.1 Function Guide, supplied from Microsoft, for detailed
descriptions about how to use SMARTDRV.EXE.

A7 - 1
 APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),
or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1. For IBM PC/AT

IBM PC/AT

25-pin female
connector
IBM PC/AT cable
CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2. For IBM PSI2

IBM PS!2

CNC, ROM wnter, or P-G

A8 - 1
 APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

l On-line cable (AO8B-0031-K8OllK802)

2 2
SD SD

RD RD
4 4

1
RS RS

25-pin male
connector
cs
20
5
I 5

20
cs
25-pin male
connector

ER ER

DR DR

CD CD
7 7
SG SG
1 1
FG FG

l IBM PC/AT cable

1 8
CD CD
2 3
RD RD
3 2
SD SD
4 20
g-pin female 25-pin female
ER ER
connector connector
5 7
SG SG
6 6
OR DR
7 4
RS RS
8 5
cs cs
9 22
Cl Cl

A8-2
 APPENDIX 9 INQUIRY FORM

APPENDIX 9 INQUIRY FORM

Companv name - Section

Person in charqe Phone No. ( 1

Address Fax No. ( )

FANUC
sales person

Version Date of
No. Product name Ordering code
No. purchase

[Usage environment]

Machine type used (PC) (Manufacturer: 1

DOS MS-DOS Version (Manufacturer: 1

EMS board: Yes I No (Manufacturer: 1

Other equipment (printer, etc.) (Manufacturer: J

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.

IDetails of inquiry]

Please use this form when you have any questlons about this product.

A9-1
 Revision Record
FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL (Eb66184EN)

. 456.6 Backup of user pro ram IS added

f 4.5.10 Selecttng On-Line ? unction from Off-Line
02 Apri. 96 Functton IS added
4.6.3.2 Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line
Function IS added
4.6.4.7 Displaylng System InformatIon is added

01 Jan. 96

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

 EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS
GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
Zone Industrielle
L6469 Echternach
4 (+352) 727979- 1
I (+352) 727979-214
BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS
GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
- Netherlands Branch -
Postbus 7230 - NL.4800 GE Breda
Minervum 1603A - NL.4817 ZL Breda
4 (+31) 765783 201 (CNC)
= (+31) 765783 212 (PLC)
I (+31) 765870 181
FRANCE
GE Fanuc Automation France S.A.
45, rue du Bois Chaland
Lisses
F-91 029 Evry Cedex
= (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC)
4 (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC)
I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation GmbH
Elberfelder Str. 45
D-40724 Hilden
4 (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC)
= (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC)
I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC)
I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC)
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland GmbH
Bensheimer Str. 61
D-65428 Russelsheim
4 (+49) 6142 357600
I (+49) 6142 357611
ITALY
GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1.
Piazza Tirana 24/4B
I-201 44 Milan0
4 (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC)
I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC)
SPAIN
GE Fanuc Automation Espana S.A.
Poligono Industrial Olaso
Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11
E-20870 Elgoibar
= (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC)
I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC)
SWITZERLAND
GE Fanuc Automation
Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz
MullerstraBe 3
CH-2562 Port
4 (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC)
= (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC)
I (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC)
I (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)
- GRAND-DUCHk DE LUXEMBOURG
CZECH REPUBLIC
GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
c/o GETSCO Inc.
Husova 5
CZ-110 00 Praha 1
= (+420) 22440 1284
I (+420) 22440 1284
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation GmbH
Bernhauser StraBe 45
D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F
= (+49) 7158 187 400
I (+49) 7158 187 455 (CNC)
I (+49) 7158 187 466 (PLC)
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation GmbH
Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20
D-091 17 Chemnitz
= (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC)
= (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC)
I (+49) 371 8448 115
SWEDEN
GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB
Hammarbacken 4
S-l 9149 Sollentuna
4 (+46) 8 444 5520
I (+46) 8 444 552 1
ITALY
GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a
Via Tortona 27
I-201 44 Milan0
= (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC)
I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC)
SPAIN
GE Power Controls Iberica S.A.
Calle Mifio, S/N
E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona)
= (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC)
I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC)
UNITED KINGDOM
GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd.
Unit 1 - Mill Square
Featherstone Road
Wolverton Mill South
Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ
= (+44) 1908 84 4000
I (+44) 1908 84 4001
01/98
 TECHNICAL REPORT No.TMN98/136E

Date Nov.16,1998
General Manager of
Software Laboratory

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:

Your information
GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E
FANUC Robotics
CINCINNATI MILACRON
Machine tool builder
Sales agency
End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE
4. Attached Document
Drawing B-62884EN/01-401/67 to 67/67
No.

5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List)

Type of data

No. FLS1-98/B087
November.16.1998

Original section of issue

IDE
V.G.M. Manager Person in

charge
 FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE

Name
OPERATORS MANUAL
Spec.No./Ed. B-62884EN/01

Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Working under a Command Prompt of a full
screen of WindowsNT4.0
Basic Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 July.1998
Add
Function (Only for PMC-SB5/SB6 for or later
Power Mate i-D/H)
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

Optional
Function

Unit

Maintenance
Parts

Notice

Correction

Another

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 1/67
 FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................3
2. Applied Software .......................................................................................................................3
3. Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0...................................................4
3.1 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................4
3.2 Installation ..........................................................................................................................5
4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2.....................................................................................5
5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ......................................................................................................6
5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................6
5.2 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................6
5.3 The Contents of Package ...................................................................................................7
5.4 Installation and Uninstallation .............................................................................................8
5.5 Operation .........................................................................................................................14

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 2/67
 1. Outline
The following function of Ladder Editing Package has been added.
Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0
Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Power Mate iD/H)
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.

Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following
manual.
Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items
FANUC OPEN CNC B-62884EN Operation for
LADDER EDITING PACKAGE Ladder Editing Package
OPERATOR'S MANUAL

2. Applied Software
The additional functions described herein apply to the following software.
Ladder Editing Package
Name Specification Version
Ladder Editing Package A08B-9201-J510 3.0 or later

PMC Control Software(Power Mate iD/H )

Software Series Version
PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 407B 02(B) or later
LADDER EDITING CARD 407D 01(A) or later

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 3/67
 3. Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0
3.1 Operating Environment
(Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment)
[present]

OS Microsoft Windows95 (Note1)
DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/
English system)
DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

[correction]

OS Microsoft Windows95 (Note1)
Microsoft Windows NT4.0 (Note7)
DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/
English system)
DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

(Add 7. in Notes of 2.1 Operating environment)

7. When using this software under Windows NT4.0, please note the following items.
a) Please install the software after referring to 2.3.1 Registering the software in
Windows [Programs] menu.
b)Please install Service Pack 3 software. Please get this Service Pack3 from
Microsoft Corporation.
c)Please define ANSI.SYS in the CONFIG file (config.nt) for WindowsNT4.0.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 4/67
 3.2 Installation
(Correct a part of the 3.2 Installation)
[present]
2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95 [Programs] menu.

[correction]
2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu.

4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2

It is possible to program the following functional instructions in PMC-SB5/SB6 of
Power Mate i-D/H
a) PSGNL functional instruction (Position signal output)
b) PSGN2 functional instruction (Position signal output 2)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 5/67
 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
5.1 Outline
(Add after 4. Error message list)
5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
5.1 Outline
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is a print software of a sequence program which works
under Windows95/NT4.0. This software is able to print a source program (FORMAT-C
type) by various forms according to the print setting. This software also has preview
function.

5.2 Operating Environment

(Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment)
[present]

Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6)

[correction]

Printer [Print (Off-line function)]
EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6)
[Ladder Printer Tool for PMC]
Printer which can be added by [Printers] of Windows (Note8)

(Add 8. in Notes of 2.1 Operating environment)

8. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is an application software for Windows95/NT4.0.
For details, refer 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6/67
 5.3 The Contents of Package
(Replace the 2.2 The Contents of Package)
2.2 The Contents of Package
The Ladder Editing Package is stored in 9 floppy disks listed below.
The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contents.
(1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-1
(2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-2
(3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-3
(4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.4) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-4
(5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-5
(6) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.6) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-6 (Note1)
(7) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.7) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-7 (Note1)
(8) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.8) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-8 (Note1)
(9) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.9) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-9 (Note1)

(Note1) Vol.6Vol.9 are disks for Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. Details on each disk are
as follows.
Vol.6 Setup disk for Japanese version
Vol.7 Setup disk for English version
Vol.8 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (1)
Vol.9 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (2)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 7/67
 5.4 Installation and Uninstallation
(Replace (12) in the 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu)
(12) Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is registered in the
[Programs] menu and the following screen is displayed. If you want to install continuously
the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click [OK] button. If you dont want to install this tool,
click [Cancel] button. When [Cancel] button is clicked, the installation terminates.

[Note]
1. The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder Editing Package has been
installed cannot be modified.
2. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for
Administrator is needed.

(Add (13), (14) in the 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu)
(13) When you install the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the following dialog is displayed.
Set a specified disk and click [OK] button.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 8/67
 (14) The installer of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts. Please input the following items
according to the instruction dialog and install this software.
(a) Registration Information (Name, Company )
(b) Installation Directory
(c) Program Folder
Please refer to 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC for details.

(Add after 5.1 Outline in 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC)

5.2 Installation and Uninstallation
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is able to be installed from the setup disk for this
software. (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English)

[Note]
1. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for
Administrator is needed.

5.2.1 Starting installer

(1) Set the setup disk (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English) in a floppy disk
drive. (this example is a case to set it in drive A.)
(2) Execute Setup.exe. The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 9/67
 5.2.2 Operating installation
The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is basically advanced according to following
procedures.
1) Installer start
2) License contract confirmation
3) User registration
4) User registration confirmation
5) Installation directory selection
6) Program folder selection
7) Installation information confirmation
8) Program copy
9) Installation completion

A main operation of installation is described as follows.

(1) User registration
Specify your name and the company name. The number of maximum characters of the
name and company name is 40 characters. If you dont input either the name or the
company name, [Next] button becomes invalid. Please input both items. After input
operation ends, click [Next] button. In default, the name and the company name of the
user registration of Windows are displayed.

Fig. 5.2.2.1 User registration screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 10/67
 (2) Installation directory selection
Specify the installation directory. When you want to install in another directory,
click [Browse] button. The directory selection screen is displayed and the installation
directory can be input or can be chosen. After you specify the installation directory,
click [Next] button. Default directory is (SystemDirectory)\Program Files\Ladder
Printer Tool.

Fig. 5.2.2.2 Installation directory selection screen

Fig. 5.2.2.3 Directory selection screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 11/67
 (3) Program folder selection
Specify the program folder. If the specified folder does not exist, new folder is created.
After you specified the folder, click [Next] button. Default folder is FAPT LADDER-II.

Fig. 5.2.2.4 Program folder selection screen

Please perform other operations of the installation according to the questions instructed
by the installer.

5.2.3 Configuration after installation

(1) Directory configuration
The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC automatically makes the following
sub-directories under the specified directory(For example C:\PRTTOOL).
C:\PRTOOL ENG (or JPN)
There are files of the help and the resource, etc. in this sub-directory.

[Note]
Dont delete the above-mentioned directory except uninstallation of this tool.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 12/67
 (2) Dynamic Link Library (DLL) files
Most of system files of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC are installed in the specified
directory. But the following DLL files are installed in the system directory of Windows
(For example : C:\Winnt40\system32).
a) Mfc40.dll
b) Msvcrt40.dll

[Note]
Dont delete the above-mentioned files except uninstallation of this tool.

(3) Program Folder and Shortcut

When installing this tool, the following program folder and shortcut are made.
The program folder name is specified by the installation of this tool.
(Default name : FAPT LADDER-II)
Two shortcuts are made as follows.
a) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC]
This is a shortcut for starting Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.
b) [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] (Note1)
This is a shortcut for uninstallation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

[Note]
1. This shortcut is made only when installing at WindowsNT4.0.

(4) Registry
When installing Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the information of this tool is written
in the registry of Windows.

5.2.4 Uninstallation
This tool has the function of uninstallation. When you execute the uninstaller, the files,
the folder, the registry, and the program folder, etc. made by the installer are deleted.
Uninstaller is started according to the following procedures.
(1) Common operations of WindowsNT4.0 and Windows95
1)Select [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on Add/Remove Program Properties of the
control panel. And click [Add/Remove] button.
2)After a confirmation dialog box is displayed, click [Yes] button. The uninstaller starts.
(2) Only operations of WindowsNT4.0
Another operation to start the uninstaller is to select [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool
for PMC] on the program folder.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 13/67
 5.5 Operation
(Add after 5.2 Installation and uninstallation in 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC)
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Start
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting PMCLDPRT.exe in the directory at
which the this tool is installed with the Explorer etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool.
And an initial menu is displayed.

5.3.2 Termination
To terminate Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click the close button of the application window,
or select the [Close] of the control menu, or select the [Exit] of the File menu on the initial
menu or the program opening menu.

5.3.3 Menu configuration

The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows.
(1) Initial menu

File Open Program

Exit

Initial menu View Tool Bar

Status Bar

Help Topic

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.1 Menu configuration

chart

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 14/67
 (2) Program opening menu

File (1) Refer to Fig. 5.3.3.2(b)

Program opening View Tool Bar

menu

Status Bar

Help Help

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration chart

Open Program

Close Program
File
Print

Preview

Printer

Exit

Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 15/67
 5.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing
The following example shows a basic operation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC from the
beginning to print Title Data and Ladder Diagram of program name RB4_SFC.
[Operation]
(1) Start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting PMCLDPRT.exe in the directory
at which the this tool is installed with the Explorer and etc., or selecting the shortcut of
this tool. And an initial menu is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.1 Initial menu screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 16/67
 (2) Open the file (Selecting the program)
1) Select [Open Program] of the [File] menu.

Fig. 5.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

2) Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the
program name which you want to open (a program name which you want to print) or
selecting the folder of the program which you want to open (a program which you
want to print) on the following screen, click [Open] button. If you select a folder
(directory) of a sequence program, the program is automatically opened. In this case,
the folder of "RB4_SFC is selected.

Fig. 5.3.4.3 Program selection screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 17/67
 3) When the program is selected, the program-opening screen is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.4 Program-opening screen

(3) Print
1) Click [Print] button of the print preview toolbar displayed in the upper part of the
program-opening screen.

[Print] button

Fig. 5.3.4.5 Print preview toolbar

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 18/67
 2) When clicking [Print] button, the print dialog is displayed. Click [Option] button
when you want to set print options. Click [Printer] button when you want to set
printer items. Refer to 5.3.8 Print screen or 5.3.9 Printer set screen for details.

Fig
. 5.3.4.6 Print dialog screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 19/67
 3) Choose items which you want to print. In this case, click [Select] button of Print
Data group, first, then choose Title Data and Ladder Diagram which are to be
printed.

Fig. 5.3.4.7 Selection item screen (1)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 20/67
 4) Erase the check marks other than Title Data and Ladder Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.4.8 Selection item screen (2)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 21/67
 5) When clicking [OK] button, the print starts. When you want to discontinue while
printing, click [Cancel] button of the printing screen.

Fig. 5.3.4.9 Printing screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 22/67
 5.3.5 Initial menu
The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder
Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three
menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.
Select [File] to open the program.
Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar.
Select [Help] to refer to help and version information.
Before specifying any program in the initial menu, [Print] button of toolbar becomes
invalid and cannot be clicked. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.5 Initial menu screen

5.3.5.1 File
The [File] menu has menus for specifying print program and for terminating Ladder
Printer Tool for PMC.

Fig. 5.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 23/67
 (1) Open Program
Open a printing program. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the program
name is selected.

Fig. 5.3.5.1 Program selection screen

Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting
a program name which you want to print, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button
to discontinue opening the program.

(2) Exit
Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 24/67
 5.3.5.2 View
[View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and status bar.
Select [Tool Bar] to switch to show and hide toolbar.
Select [Status Bar] to switch to show and hide status bar.

Fig. 5.3.5.2 [View] menu screen

(1) Tool Bar

Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most common
commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menu
item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar.

(2) Status Bar

Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by
the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check
mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to 5.3.11
Status Bar for details of status bar.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 25/67
 5.3.5.3 Help
[Help] menu is a menu related to help and version information.
Select [Topic] to refer to help and to retrieve the topic.
Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(a) [Help] menu screen

(1) Topic
Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. An index to topics, on which
you can get help, is offered to you. From the opening screen, you can jump to step-by-
step
instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and to various types of reference
information. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want
to return to the opening screen.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 26/67
 Fig. 5.3.5.3(b) Help Topics screen

(2) Version
The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version
number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to
the menu screen, click [OK] button.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(c) Version information screen

5.3.6 Program Opening Menu
Program Opening Menu is a menu in the state that the program is selected. There are

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 27/67
 three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in Program Opening Menu.
Select [File] to operate functions related to files and printing.
Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar.
Select [Help] to refer to the help and version information.
When specifying the program, [Print] button from the toolbar can be clicked. Refer to
5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu screen

5.3.6.1 File
[File] menu is a menu to operate functions related to files and printing.
Select [Open Program] to open an existing program.
Select [Close Program] to close the program which is opened now.
Select [Print] to print and to set the print option data.
Select [Preview] to display the document on the screen as it would appear on the
printed document.
Select [Printer] to select a printer and printer connection setting.

Fig. 5.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening)

(1) Open Program

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 28/67
 Close a program which is opened now and open a new program. File dialog is
displayed as a screen where the program name is specified. Refer to (1) Open Program
in 5.3.5.1 File for details.

(2) Close Program

Close a program, which is opened now. After closing the program, the menu becomes
an initial menu.

(3) Print
The sequence program is printed, and the option of the print item is set, and the
printer is set. Print dialog screen is opened. Refer to 5.3.8 Print screen for details.

(4) Preview
Displays the document on the screen as it would appear on printed document. The
main
window will be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages will be
displayed in their printed format. Refer to 5.3.7 Preview screen for details of preview.

(5) Printer
Selects a printer and set various items. Print setting dialog is displayed.
Refer to 5.3.9 Printer set screen for details.

(6) Exit
Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 29/67
 5.3.6.2 View
[View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and the display of status
bar.
Select Tool Bar to switch display and hide of toolbar.
Select Status Bar to switch display and hide of status bar.

(1) Tool Bar

Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most
common commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to
the menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of
toolbar.

(2) Status Bar

Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by
the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check
mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to 5.3.11
Status Bar for details of status bar.

5.3.6.3 Help
[Help] menu is a menu related to the help and version information.
Select [Help] to refer to the help.
Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(a) [Help] menu screen (Program opening)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 30/67
 (1) Help
Offers you a help of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. From the opening screen, you can
jump to step-by-step instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and
various
types of reference information.
Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to
return
to the opening screen.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(b) Help screen

(2) Version
The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version
number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to
the menu screen, click [OK] button.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 31/67
 5.3.7 Preview Screen (Program opening screen)
When selecting [Preview], the preview screen is displayed. When opening the program
specified with [Program Open], [Title] preview of the program is displayed.
The preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time; to move
back and forth through the document; to zoom in and out of pages; and to initiate a print
job. When selecting [Title] and [Ladder] and etc. button of the print item on toolbar, the
Preview screen corresponding to the button is displayed.
The print item not selected by print dialog cannot preview, and the print item which dose
not correspond by PMC model cannot be previewed.

Fig. 5.3.7 Preview screen (Program opening screen)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 32/67
 Details of each button are as follows.

Tool Operation
Bring up the print dialog box, to start a print job.
Preview the previous printed page.
Preview the next printed page.
Preview one or two printed pages at a time.
Zoom in the printed page.
Zoom out the printed page.
Return from print preview to the editing window.

Display Preview of Title Data.

Display Preview of System Parameter.
Display Preview of Symbol Comment.
Display Preview of Ladder Diagram.
Display Preview of Step Sequence Diagram.
Display Preview of I/O Module Data.
Display Preview of Message Data.
Display Preview of Cross Reference.
Display Preview of Bit Address Map.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 33/67
 5.3.8 Print Screen
The sequence program is printed. Moreover, the print option and the printer is set.

5.3.8.1 Print setting

Select and print the item that you want to print in this dialog. Moreover, the print option
setting dialog and the printer setting dialog can be called.

Fig. 5.3.8.1 Print dialog

Details of each item are as follows.

[Program Name] Group Display the program name, which is opened now.

[Print Data] Group Choose the item, which you want to print. In default,
[ALL] is checked.
[ALL] Specify to print all data.
[Select] Specify the print data. The print item can be selected by
checking [Select]. The checked print item is printed.
The print item do not correspond by the PMC model is
not
displayed.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 34/67
 [OK] Button Begins the print.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue printing.
[Option] Button Set the option concerning the print data. When this
button is selected, the print option set dialog is
displayed.
[Printer] Button Do the printer setting and the print setting. When this
button is selected, the printer set dialog is displayed.

5.3.8.2 Title Data print

Set the option of the Title Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.2 Title Data print option screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 35/67
 Details of each item are as follows.
[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Title Data print.
The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the
frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be
specified up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Title Data print. In default,
Title Data is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Title Data print. The character
string is not set in default.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the Title
Data print. This button is effective when any print item
is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Title Data print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 36/67
 5.3.8.3 System Parameter print
Set the option of the System Parameter print.

Fig. 5.3.8.3 System Parameter print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the System Parameter
print. The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the
frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be
specified up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the System Parameter print.
In default, System Parameter is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the System Parameter print. Any
character string is not set in default.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 37/67
 [Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the
System Parameter print. This button is effective when
any print item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option
setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option setting dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the System Parameter print option.

5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print

Set the option of the Symbol & Comment print.

Fig. 5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print option screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 38/67
 Details of each item are as follows.
[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Symbol & Comment
print. The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. In
default, Symbol & Comment is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. Any
character string is not set in default.

[Page Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Line No.] Specify the range of the line number, which you want
to print.
[Page No.] Specify the range of the page number, which you want
to print.

[Comment] Group Select the kind of comment. In default, [Relay Comment]

is checked.
[Relay Comment] Specify to print only the relay comment.
[Coil Comment] Specify to print only the coil comment.
[Relay Comment/Coil Comment] Specify to print both the relay comment and the
coil comment.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the
Symbol & Comment print. This button is effective when
any print item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Symbol & Comment print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 39/67
 5.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print
Set the option of the Ladder Diagram print.

(1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to be
printed. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In default,
Ladder Diagram is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any
character string is not set in default.
[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Net No.] Specify the range of the net, which you want to print.
[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 40/67
 [Print Program] Group Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Unit] Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram name
which you want to print, or select the subprogram name
from combo box.

[Relay/Coil] Group Specify the data printed for each contact. In default,
[Symbol] is checked.
[Symbol] Print the symbol data of contact.
[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram.
Default is no form feed.

[Cross Reference] Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no

cross reference.

[Details] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print.

The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayed
when selecting. Refer to 2 Ladder Diagram print option
detailed screen for details.
[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the
Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any print
item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option
setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option setting dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 41/67
 (2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is
checked.
[Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is
checked.

[Line] Group Specify the space between lines in the net. In default,
[Narrow] is checked.
[Narrow] Print the lines of the net with narrow space.
[Wide] Print the lines of the net with wide space.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 42/67
 5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print
Set the option of the Step Sequence Diagram print. As for the PMC model which doesnt
correspond to the step sequence, this page is not displayed. Moreover, the PMC model
that corresponds to the step sequence is not displayed if there is no step sequence file
either.

Fig. 5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Step Sequence
Diagram print. An integer value can be set. In default,
1 is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 43/67
 [Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. In
default, Step Sequence Diagram is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. Any
character string is not set in default.

[Print Program] Group Select Step Sequence Program to be printed. In default,

[All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Unit] Print selected subprogram. Input the subprogram name,
which you want to print or select the subprogram name
from combo box.
[Sub Program No.] Specify the presence of the print of the sub program
number. Default is checked.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the Step
Sequence Diagram print. This button is effective when
any print item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Step Sequence Diagram print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 44/67
 5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print
Set the option of the I/O Module Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the I/O Module Data.
An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. In default,
I/O Module is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. Any character
string is not set in default.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 45/67
 [Print Channel] Group Specify the print channel. Only when the PMC model is
PMC-QC, it is possible to set this item. This group is not
displayed for another model.
[1 Channel] Print the first channel. Default is checked.
[2 Channel] Print the second channel. Default is checked.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the I/O
Module Data print. This button is effective when any
print item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the I/O Module Data print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 46/67
 5.3.8.8 Message Data print
Set the option of the Message Data print. When the PMC model is PMC-QC, this
page is not displayed because there is no message file.

Fig. 5.3.8.8(a) Message Data print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Message Data.
An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Message Data. In default,
Message is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Message Data. Any character
string is not set in default.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 47/67
 [Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to
print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.8(b) for the specification of
range.
[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the
Message Data print. This button is effective when any
print item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option
setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option setting dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Message Data print option.

Table 5.3.8.8(b) Specification of address of Message Data

Address specification Example of key Output address
Kind input
Bit Address A5.0 Only the specified bit address
Byte Address A4 Specified Byte Address and Bit
Address in a range of 0-7.
Address range A2.3-A5.7 All addresses within the specified
Specification Range

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 48/67
 5.3.8.9 Cross Reference print
Set the option of the Cross Reference print.

(1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference.
An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 49/67
 [Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In default,
Cross Reference is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any
character string is not set in default.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to
print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.9(b) for the specification of
range.
[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print.
The plural items can be specified.

[Comment] Group Specify the printed comment. In default,

[Relay Comment] is checked.
[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment.
[Coil Comment] Print the coil comment.

[Double Check] Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doubly
and the double use of the function instruction is
executed.
Default is not checked.

[Details] Button Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The
Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayed
when selecting. Refer to (2) Cross Reference print option
detailed screen for details.
[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the Cross
Reference. This button is effective when any print item is
selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.

Table 5.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table

Address specification Example of key Output address
Kind input
Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address
Byte Address X10 Specified byte address
(Contain the bit address)

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 50/67
 Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within the
range specification specified range
F10.5-F10 To the specified byte address
from the specified bit address

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 51/67
 Details of each item are as follows.
[Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The
guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19
characters.
[Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default,
STEP NO./NET NO. is set.
[Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character
string is not set in default.

[Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number.

[Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number is
printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked in
default and [Top Char] is S.
[Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number is
printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in
default and [Top Char] is N.
[Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, Step No./Net No.
is set.

[Coil Guidance] Group Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram
Graphics] is checked.
[Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram.
[User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined.
The following four can be defined, when [User Define
String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13
characters.
[Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by
Read contact. In default, Read is set.
[Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by
Write contact. In default, Write is set.
[Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by
Set contact. In default, Set is set.
[Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by
Reset contact. In default, Reset is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 52/67
 [Line Feed Count] Specify the number of line feed inserted between the
addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified.
In default, 1 is set.

[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds

of address. Default is checked.

5.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print

Set the option of the Bit Address Map.

(1) Bit Address Map print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 53/67
 Details of each item are as follows.
[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map
print. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In default,
Bit Address Map is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any
character string is not set in default.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to
print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.10(b) for the specification of
range.
[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print.
The plural items can be specified.
[Using Address] Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Details] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print.
The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is
displayed when selecting. Refer to 2 Bit Address Map
print option detailed screen for details.
[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the Bit
Address
Map print. This button is effective when any print item
is
selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 54/67
 Table 5.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table
Address specification Example of key Output address
Kind input
Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address
Byte Address X10 Specified byte address
(Contain the bit address)
Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within
Range specification the specified range
F10-F20 All addresses within
the specified range

(2) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Fig, 5.3.8.10(c) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds
of the addresses. Default is checked.

[Use Address Mark] An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark.
Specify one character. In default, @ is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 55/67
 5.3.8.11 Common Item
Set the option of a Common Item.

Fig. 5.3.8.11 Common Item option set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Guidance Message Language] Group Specify the guide message language when
the title and the system parameter are
printed. [First Language] is checked in
default and [First Language](combo box)
is English.
[First Language] Print in the language selected in the first language.
[First/Second Language] Print in the languages selected in the First language
and the Second language.
[First Language] (combo box) Specify the first language. In default, "English is
set.
[Second Language] (combo box) Specify the second language. When [First/Second
Language] is selected, it is possible to specify.
In default, "English is set.
[Print] Group Specify the cover page print. In default, [Cover] is not
checked.
[Cover] Specify the presence of the cover page. A file can be
specified when this item is checked. The file can be
selected with the File button. The format of the cover

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 56/67
 page file which can be selected is a metafile.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Common Item.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 57/67
 5.3.9 Printer set screen
5.3.9.1 Printer setting
Set the printer.

Fig. 5.3.9.1 Printer set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Printer] Group The printer setting and display information.
[Name] Set the printer used. Choose the Default Printer; or
choose the Specific Printer option and select one of the
current installed printers shown in the box. You install
printers and configure ports using the Windows Control
Panel.
[Cond] Display the state of the selected printer.
[Kind] Display the kind of the selected printer.
[Spot] Display the place of the selected printer.
[Cmnt] Display additional information on the selected printer.

[OK] Button Save the printer setting and end printer dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the printer setting and end printer dialog.
[Page] Button Display print setting Dialog to set the number of lines
per one form the margin, etc..
Refer to 5.3.9.2 - 5.3.9.6 for details.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 58/67
 5.3.9.2 Line Count
Set the line count, and point of character/line, and font which can be printed on one page,
when printing other than the Ladder Diagram and Step Sequence Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.9.2 Line Count set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be
printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be
automatically adjusted according to Line Count.
In default, 72 is set.
[Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might
be automatically adjusted according to Char Point.
In default, 10 is set.
[Line Point] Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font
Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line
Point. In default, 10 is set.

[Font] Group Specify font.

[Font Face] Set the font face. In default, System is set.
[Font Size] Set the font size. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point
might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size.
In default, 10 is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 59/67
 [Reset] Button Reset all the items of Line Count page to the default.
[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting
dialog.
[Help] Button Display the help of Line Count.

5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder)

Set the line count printed on one page, and point of character/line, and font etc., when
the
Ladder Diagram and the Step Sequence Diagram is printed.

Fig. 5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be
printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be
automatically adjusted according to Line Count.
In default, 78 is set.
[Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might
be automatically adjusted according to Char Point.
In default, 9 is set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 60/67
 [Line Point] Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font
Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line
Point. In default, 9 is set.

[Font] Group Specify font.

[Ladder Data] Select Ladder Data for which the Font is set.
[Font Face] Set the font face with which selected [Ladder Data] is
printed. The all default is System.
[Font Size] Set the font size with which selected [Ladder Data] is
printed. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might be
automatically adjusted according to Font Size. The all
default is 9.

[Reset] Button Reset all the items of Line Count(Ladder) page to the
default.
[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting
dialog.
[Help] Button Display the help of Line Count(Ladder).

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 61/67
 5.3.9.4 Margin
Set margin at the top, bottom, right and left in the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.4 Margin set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Upper] Set an upper margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).
In default, 20 is set.
[Under] Set an under margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).
In default, 10 is set.
[Right] Set a right margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).
In default, 10 is set.
[Left] Set a left margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).
In default, 10 is set.

[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting
dialog.
[Help] Button Display the help of Margin.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 62/67
 5.3.9.5 Paper Size
Set the size of the printed form.

Fig. 5.3.9.5 Paper Size set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Size] Set the size of the form. In default, A4 is set.

[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting
dialog.
[Help] Button Display the help of Paper Size.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 63/67
 5.3.9.6 Print Type
Set various items concerning the frame added to the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.6 Print Type set screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Frame Print] Group Set the presence of the frame and the character string
printed. If [Frame Print] is not checked, the following
setting cannot be done.
[File] Specify the metafile name used when the frame is
printed. The file name can be selected with the File
button.
[Data] Specify the data for which the character string,
coordinates, and font are set.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 64/67
 [String] Specify the printed character string set with [Data].
The data specification by the following forms is also
possible.
%[T]: Print the title data.
%[S]: Print the sub title data.
%[P]: Print the program name.
%[N]: Print page number.
Default is as follows.
String Data 1: %[P]
String Data 2: %[T]
String Data 3: %[N]
String Data 4: %[S]
String Data 5 is not set.
[X Pos] Specify the print beginning position (X coordinates) of
the
character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter
(mm). Default is as follows.
String Data 1: 10
String Data 2: 75
String Data 3: 180
String Data 4: 75
String Data 5: 0
[Y Pos] Specify the print beginning position (Y coordinates) of
the
character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter
(mm). Default is as follows.
String Data 1: 10
String Data 2: 10
String Data 3: 10
String Data 4: 15
String Data 5: 0
[Font] Group Specify the font set with [Data].
[Font Face] Specify the font face set with [Data]. The all default is
System.
[Font Size] Specify the font size set with [Data]. The all default is
12.

[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting
dialog.
[Help] Button Display the help of Print type.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 65/67
 5.3.10 Toolbar
The toolbar is displayed below the menu bar at the top of the application window.
The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Ladder Printer
Tool for PMC.
To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the View menu.

Fig. 5.3.10 Toolbar

Details of each button are as follows.

Tool Operation
Open an existing document. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC displays the
open dialog box, in which you can locate and open the desired file. It is
a shortcut to 5.3.5.1 (1)Program Open and 5.3.6.1 (1)Program Open.
Open the print dialog. It is a shortcut to 5.3.6.1 (3)Print. However,
this button is invalid and cannot be selected by an initial menu
because the program is not selected.
Display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of
Ladder
Printer Tool for PMC. It is a shortcut to 5.3.5.3 (2)Version and
5.3.6.3 (2)Version.
Use the Context Help command to obtain help on some portion of
Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. When you choose the Toolbar's Context
Help button, the mouse pointer will change to an arrow and question
mark. Then click somewhere in the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
window, such as another Toolbar button. The Help topic will be shown
for the item you clicked.

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 66/67
 5.3.11 Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window.
To display or hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu.

The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys
to navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions
of toolbar buttons as you depress them, before releasing them. If after viewing the
description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command,
then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button.

The center area of the status bar displayed the program name and the PMC model
name. The right area of the status bar displayed the state of ON/OFF of a special
key.
Pane1 Simple help
Pane2 Program name
Pane3 PMC model
Pane4 State of key : Latched down is displayed
[Scroll Lock] Key, [NUM Lock] Key, and [Caps Lock] Key from the
right

Simple help Program name PMC model State of key

Fig. 5.3.11 Status Bar

TITLE
FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY
OPERATORS MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 67/67
 TECHNICAL REPORT No. TMN99/30E

Date,4 March 1999

General Manager of
Application Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:

O Your information
O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E
FANUC Robotics
CINCINNATI MILACRON
O Machine tool builder
Sales agency
End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice
FAPT LADDER-II
4. Attached Document
Drawin B-66184EN/02-6 (01/25 to 25/25)
g
No.

5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List)

Type of data

Original section of issue

IDE
General Section Person in
Manager Manager Charge

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 1/26
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Programming PMC-NB6
Basic Feb. 1999
Saving and restoring the print options Add
Function or later
Changing the print option set screens

Optional
Function

Unit
Maintenanc
e
Parts
Notice

Correction

Another

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 2/26
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................4
2. Applied Software .......................................................................................................................4
3. Programming PMC-NB6 ............................................................................................................5
3.1 Supported PMC models .....................................................................................................5
3.2 System parameters ............................................................................................................6
4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC........................................8
4.1 Changing Menu configuration.............................................................................................8
4.2 Initial menu.......................................................................................................................10
4.3 Program opening menu ....................................................................................................12
5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ...............................................13
5.1 Ladder Diagram print........................................................................................................13
5.2 Cross Reference print.......................................................................................................16
5.3 Bit Address Map print .......................................................................................................20
6. Operating environment ............................................................................................................22
7. Available characters in symbol ................................................................................................24
8. Config file ................................................................................................................................25

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 3/26
 1. Outline
The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added.
- Programming PMC-NB6
- Saving and restoring the print options
- Changing the print option set screens

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.

Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following
manual.
Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items
FAPT LADDER-II B- Operation for
OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

2. Applied Software
The additional functions described herein apply to the following software.
FAPT LADDER-II
Name Specification Version
FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 3.2 or later

PMC Control Software (for Series 15i )

Software Series Version
PMC-NB6 control software 404A 01 or later

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 4/26
 3. Programming PMC-NB6
3.1 Supported PMC models
(Correct a part of the For PMC models table of 1.1 Overview)
[present]
Abbreviations PMC Models
PMC-SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1
PMC-SA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3
....
....
PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB
PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

[correction]
Abbreviations PMC Models
PMC-SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1
PMC-SA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3
....
....
PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB
PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2
PMC-NB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB6

(Correct a part of the 1.2.2 PMC models to be supported)

[present]
PMC-SA1
PMC-SA3 (Note1)
....
....
PMC-NB2
PMC-PA3
PMC-QC (Note1)
[correction]
PMC-SA1
PMC-SA3
....
....
PMC-NB2
PMC-NB6
PMC-PA3
PMC-QC (Note1)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 5/26
 3.2 System parameters
(Add after the (ii) PMC-SC3/SC4/QC/NB/NB2 of
4.5.2.6 (4)System parameter editing screen and input item for each PMC model)
(iv) PMC-NB6

Fig. 4.5.2.6(c)

Refer to the PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL(B-61863E) about setting value of

Each System parameters.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6/26
 (Add after the PMC-QC/NB/NB2 of
4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (Single-Format) (a)Parameter)
PMC-NB6

%@0
2 BCD 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not
4 PMC-NB6 used)
7 100 4. PMC model (PMC-NB6)
% 7. Ladder execution time (1% to 150%)
[EOB]

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used),
specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image
address as follows:

3. YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 7/26
 4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
4.1 Changing Menu configuration
(Replace the 6.3.3 Menu configuration)

6.3.3 Menu configuration

The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows.
(1) Initial menu

File Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.1(b)

Initial menu View Tool Bar

Status Bar

Help Topic

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.1(a) Menu configuration chart

Open Program

Save Option File

File
Restore Option File

Exit

Fig. 6.3.3.1(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 8/26
 (2) Program opening menu

File Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.2(b)

Program opening View Tool Bar

menu

Status Bar

Help Help

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration

h
Open Program

Close Program
File
Save Option File

Restore Option File

Print

Preview

Printer

Exit

Fig. 6.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 9/26
 (Replace the Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen of
6.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing)

Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

4.2 Initial menu

(Correct a part of the 6.3.5 Initial menu)
[present]
6.3.5 Initial menu
The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of
Ladder
Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three
menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.
Select [File] to open the program.

[correction]
6.3.5 Initial menu
The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of
Ladder
Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three
menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.
Select [File] to open the program or to save a option file or restore a option file.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 10/26
 (Replace the Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen of 6.3.5.1 File)

Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen

(Insert after the (1) Open Program of 6.3.5.1 File)

(2) Save Option File
Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where
the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is
displayed.
After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button.
Click
[Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file.

(3) Restore Option File

Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen
where
the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is
displayed.
After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button.
Click
[Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 11/26
 4.3 Program opening menu
(Replace the Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) of 6.3.6.1 File )

Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening)

(Insert after the (2) Close Program of 6.3.6.1 File)

(3) Save Option File
Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where
the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is
displayed.
After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button.
Click
[Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file.

(4) Restore Option File

Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen
where
the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is
displayed.
After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button.
Click
[Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 12/26
 5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC
5.1 Ladder Diagram print
(Replace the (1)Ladder Diagram print option screen of 6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print)

(1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group
[Page No.]
Set page number.
Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to
be
printed. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is
set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the
frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be
specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In
default,
Ladder Diagram is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any
character string is not set in default.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 13/26
 [Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Net No.] Specify the range of the net, which you want to print.
[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to
print.

[Print Program] Group Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is

checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Unit] Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram
name
which you want to print, or select the subprogram
name
from combo box.

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed.

[Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram.
Default is no form feed.

[Details] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print.

The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is
displayed
when selecting. Refer to (2) Ladder Diagram print
option
detailed screen for details.
[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the
Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any
print
item is selected.
[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option
setting dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option setting dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 14/26
 (Replace the (2)Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen of
6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print)

(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Step No./Net No.] group Specify the presence of the step number / net number.
[Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is
checked.
[Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is
checked.

[Line] Group Specify the space between lines in the net. In default,
[Narrow] is checked.
[Narrow] Print the lines of the net with narrow space.
[Wide] Print the lines of the net with wide space.

[Relay/Coil] Group Specify the data printed for each contact. In default,
[Symbol] is checked.
[Symbol] Print the symbol data of contact.
[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Cross Reference] Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no

cross reference.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 15/26
 5.2 Cross Reference print
(Replace the (1)Cross Reference print option screen of 6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print)

(1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference.
An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the
frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be
specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In
default,
Cross Reference is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any
character string is not set in default.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 16/26
 [Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to
print. Refer to Table 6.3.8.9(b) for the specification
of
range.
[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to
print.
The plural items can be specified.

[Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The
guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19
characters.
[Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default,
STEP NO./NET NO. is set.
[Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character
string is not set in default.

[Page/Line Feed] Group Specify form feed.

[Line Feed Count] Specify the number of line feed inserted between the
addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified.
In default, 1 is set.
[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different
kinds
of address. Default is checked.

[Details] Button
[Preview] Button
[OK] Button
[Cancel] Button
[Help] Button
Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The
Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is
displayed
when selecting. Refer to (2) Cross Reference print
option
detailed screen for details.
Save the print option setting and preview the Cross
Reference. This button is effective when any print
item is selected.
Save the print option setting and end the print option
set
dialog.
Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 17/26
 Table 6.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table
Address specification Example of key Output address
Kind input
Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address
Byte Address X10 Specified byte address
(Contain the bit address)
Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within the
range specification specified range
F10.5-F10 To the specified byte address
from the specified bit address

(Replace the (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen of

6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print)

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 18/26
 Details of each item are as follows.
[Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number.
[Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number is
printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked
in
default and [Top Char] is S.
[Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number is
printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in
default and [Top Char] is N.
[Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, Step No./Net
No.
is set.

[Coil Guidance] Group Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram
Graphics] is checked.
[Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder
diagram.
[User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined.
The following four can be defined, when [User Define
String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13
characters.
[Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference
by
Read contact. In default, Read is set.
[Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference
by
Write contact. In default, Write is set.
[Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference
by
Set contact. In default, Set is set.
[Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference
by
Reset contact. In default, Reset is set.

[Comment] Group Specify the printed comment. In default,

[Relay Comment] is checked.
[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment.
[Coil Comment] Print the coil comment.

[Double Check] Specify whether the checking of writing the coil

doubly
and the double use of the function instruction is
executed.
Default is not checked.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 19/26
 5.3 Bit Address Map print
(Replace the 6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print)

6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print

Set the option of the Bit Address Map.

Fig. 6.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.
[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map
print. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is
set.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 20/26
 [Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the
frame
print is specified. A title and a sub title can be
specified
up to 60 characters.
[Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In
default,
Bit Address Map is set.
[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any
character string is not set in default.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.
[All] All are printed.
[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to
print. Refer to Table 6.3.8.10(b) for the specification
of
range.
[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to
print.
The plural items can be specified.
[Using Address] Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed.

[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different
kinds
of the addresses. Default is checked.

[Use Address Mark] Group Specify the use address mark.

[Use Address Mark] An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address
mark.
Specify one character. In default, @ is set.

[Details] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map

[Preview] Button
print.
The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is
displayed when selecting. Refer to 2 Bit Address Map
print option detailed screen for details.
Save the print option setting and preview the Bit
Address
Map print. This button is effective when any print
item is
selected.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 21/26
 [OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option
set
dialog.
[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print
option set dialog.
[Help] Button Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print
option.

Table 6.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table

Address specification Example of key Output address
Kind input
Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit
address
Byte Address X10 Specified byte address
(Contain the bit address)
Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within
Range specification the specified range
F10-F20 All addresses within
the specified range

6. Operating environment
(Correct a part of the 2 Operating environment)
[present]
....
Memory Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 2)
EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 3)
....

[correction]
....
Memory Conventional memory 540 Kbytes or more (Note 2)
EMS and/or XMS memory
4 Mbytes or more of EMS and/or XMS in total (recommended) (Note
3)
....

(Correct a part of the Note 2 of 2 Operating environment)

(Note 2) Even if the computer has 640 Kbytes memory, the free memory may be less
than
540 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space.
The size of free space in memory can be checked with the DOS command
CHKDSK
or MEM.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 22/26
 (Correct a part of the About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: of
2 Operating environment)
[present]
About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:
EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as a
temporary area. Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of
EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be
necessary
for better performance.
(1) Expansion memory

[correction]
About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:
EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder, symbol & comment data and On-line
Function as a temporary area. A part of function in FAPT LADDER-II dose not run if
there is no EMS and/or XMS memory. EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary.
Enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle
will be necessary for better performance.
(1) Expansion memory
....
....
(4) On-line Function
When using On-line function, 1Mbytes or more EMS and/or XMS memory are
necessary

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 23/26
 7. Available characters in symbol
(Correct a part of the (2) Symbol & comment specification list of
1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data)
(Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment)
[present]
(2) Symbol & comment specification list
(a) For input signal and internal relay
Specification Symbol
Available ASCII characters
characters (lower-case alphabetic
characters not allowed)
Maximum cha. 16byte
Maximum 20,000 entries (Note)
number
Duplicated Not allowed
definition
Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or
CRT/MDI shorter.

[correction]
(2) Symbol & comment specification list
(a) For input signal and internal relay
Specification Symbol
Available ASCII characters
characters (lower-case alphabetic
characters and space
character are not
allowed
Maximum cha. 16byte
Maximum 20,000 entries (Note)
number
Duplicated Not allowed
definition
Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or
CRT/MDI shorter

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 24/26
 8. Config file
(Replace the 2.1 Config.sys)

2.5 CONFIG.SYS
To use the system, make the following modifications to the CONFIG file.
The CONFIG file of each OS is as follows.
a) For WindowsNT4.0 CONFIG.NT
b) For Windows95 CONFIG.SYS
c) For DOS CONFIG.SYS

(1) When the system is used under WindowsNT4.0

[ The following example shows the case when WindowsNT4.0 is installed
in C:\WINNT ]
Specify the ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.NT file. The CONFIG.NT file and ANSI.SYS
file are usually in the following folder. Check if these file are in the folder.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\
Add the following line to CONFIG.NT file by using a text editor.
devicehigh=%SystemRoot%\system32\ansi.sys

(2) When the system is used under Windows 95

[ The following example shows the case when Windows 95 is installed
in C:\WINDOWS ]
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\ANSI.SYS
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE
When the system is used under Windows95, the Japanese input system is not
specified
in the CONFIG.SYS file.
In DOS mode, only the DOS version Japanese input system can be used.
The DOS version Japanese input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV
command. For details of the installation method, see DOSIME.BAT under the
COMMAND director of Windows and DOSIME.SYS under the root directory of
the
start-up disk.

(3)When the system is used under DOS

[ The following example shows the case when DOS is already installed in C:\DOS ]
DEVICE=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE
DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIME.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIMEK.SYS

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 25/26
 [ About device drivers ]
a)ANSI.SYS (required)
The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot
be omitted.
b)EMM386.EXE
This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. When
using another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of setting
required in CONFIG.SYS.
c)MSIME.SYS / MSIMEK.SYS
This device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language
input.
When using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant
manual
for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.

Notes
1. All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with
WindowsNT4.0 /
Windows95 / MS-DOS. The specification of switches and parameters may
be
required for the above settings. For details, refer to the on-line help or the
relevant manual for the WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS.
2. When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with the
memory
card for details of the setting required in CONFIG file.
3. Some device drivers may adversely affect the FAPT LADDER-II. If a
problem
is anticipated, specify only ANSI.SYS in CONFIG file. Omit the specified,
FAPT LADDER-II will support only English, but allows any contention with
other device drivers to be identified quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed
in
Appendix 7.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.02.26 Ino New making B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 26/26
 TECHNICAL REPORT No. TMN99/145E

Date 15 October, 1999

General Manager of
Application Software
Development Department

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:

O Your information
O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E
FANUC Robotics
CINCINNATI MILACRON
O Machine tool builder
Sales agency
End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice
FAPT LADDER-II
4. Attached Document
Drawin B-66184EN/02-7 (01/16 to 16/16)
g
No.

5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List)

Type of data

No. AS0S2-99/A030
October.15.1999

Original section of issue

IDE
General Section Person in
Manager Manager Charge
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
I/O Link expansion
(Only for PMC-SB6 for Series 16i /18i
/21i)
Basic Improvement of partial protection Oct. 1999
Add
Function function of ladder program by or later
special password
(Only for PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ)
for Series 16i /18i /21i)

Optional
Function

Unit
Maintenanc
e
Parts
Notice
Correction
Another

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 2/17
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline____________________________________________________________________ 4
2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________ 4
3. I/O Link expansion ________________________________________________________ 5
3.1 The number of I/O Link channel ______________________________________________ 5
3.2 Mnemonic Editing ____________________________________________________________ 6
4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program
by special password _________________________________________________ 8
5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES ________________________________________________ 15

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 3/17
 1. Outline
The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added.
- I/O Link expansion
- Improvement of partial protect funciotn of ladder program by special password

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.

Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following
manual.
Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items
FAPT LADDER-II B- Operation for
OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

2. Applied Software
The additional functions described herein apply to the following software.
FAPT LADDER-II
(1) I/O Link expansion
Name Specification Version
FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 04.0 or later

(2) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special

password
Name Specification Version
FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 03.3 or later

PMC Control Software (for Series 16i /18i /21i )

(1) I/O Link expansion
Software Series Version
PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 406A 15 or later

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 4/17
 3. I/O Link expansion
3.1 The number of I/O Link channel
(Insert after the (3) Specifying the direction for online communication
in "4.4.1 Program selection")

(4) Specifying the number of I/O Link channel

When models in which more than two channels can be set is selected, the following
menu is displayed.

In this menu., it selects the number of I/O Link channel.

(When model is PMC-QC this menu is not displayed, because PMC-QC always has two
channels.)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 5/17
 3.2 Mnemonic Editing
(Correct a part of the PMC-PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6
"4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) (a)Parameter")

[present]
%@0
PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6
2 BINARY 2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used)
4 PMC-RB4 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC-
% RA5/
[EOB] PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/
PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ))

[correction]
PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6

%@0
2 BINARY 2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used)
4 PMC-RB4 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC-
% RA5/
[EOB] PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/
PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)/
PMC-RB6(IO-2)/PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2))

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6/17
 (Add to the "[Setting data table to "PMC model" parametereach PMC model] "
of "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files(single-format) (a)Parameter ")

[present]
PMC model Setting data (Normal-width character string)
PMC-SA1 PMC-RA1
PMC-SA3 PMC-RA3
PMC-SA5 PMC-RA5
PMC-SB3 PMC-RB3
PMC-SB4 PMC-RB4
PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)
PMC-SB5 PMC-RB5
PMC-SB6 PMC-RB6
PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)
PMC-SC3 PMC-RC3
PMC-SC4 PMC-RC4
PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ)
PMC-NB PMC-NB
PMC-NB2 PMC-NB2
PMC-PA3 PMC-PA3
PMC-QC PMC-QC

[correcting]
PMC model Setting data (Normal-width character string)
PMC-SA1 PMC-RA1
PMC-SA3 PMC-RA3
PMC-SA5 PMC-RA5
PMC-SB3 PMC-RB3
PMC-SB4 PMC-RB4
PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)
PMC-SB5 PMC-RB5
PMC-SB6 PMC-RB6
PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)
PMC-SB6(IO-2) PMC-RB6(IO-2)
PMC-SB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2)
PMC-SC3 PMC-RC3
PMC-SC4 PMC-RC4
PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ)
PMC-NB PMC-NB
PMC-NB2 PMC-NB2
PMC-NB6 PMC-NB6
PMC-PA3 PMC-PA3
PMC-QC PMC-QC

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 7/17
 4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password

(Replace the 4.5.4.3 Password set function)

4.5.4.3 Password set function

This function is supported only in the series 15-B/16/18/21-B, Series 16/18/21-C,

Power Mate-H, Series 15i, Series 16i /18i /21i A, and Power Mate i D/H.
It enables a password to be added during compilation.
The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited
on the
CTR/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Setting
program options.)

(1) Password
(a)Password types
Type Use
Password(R) Password to allow display on the CNC
Password (R/W) Password to allow display and editing on the CNC

(b)Password setting(compile)
1 When no password Go to .
When password RW&R,RW,R
After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to
specify whetherto use a password.
Do you enter password ?(Y/N)
To set a password, press Y password RW&R or R go to.
It is unnecessary to set a password, press N password RW go to .
2 The password set screen appears.
Enter password (R)

3 Enter a password
A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or
numerals.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a
lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as
*,#,and @).

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 8/17
 Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is
displayed. In such a case, use another character string.
An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of
a password is not specified. If password=RW&R go to .
If password=R go to .
When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued
go to .
4 The password configuration screen appears.
Verification(R)

5 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure
that
your password was entered correctly.
When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it
is
accepted
When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued
go to .
If password=R is specified. go to .
The password(R/W) set screen appears.

Enter password (R/W)

Enter a password(R/W).
A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or
numerals.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a
lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as
*,#,and @).
Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is
displayed. In such a case, use another character string.
An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of
a password is not specified. go to .
When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued
go to .
The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification(R/W)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 9/17
 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure
that
your password was entered correctly.
When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it
is
accepted
When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued
go to .
Compilation begins.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 10/17
 (2)Special password
(a)Partial protecting function
Partial protection of a ladder program can be done by dividing the
subprogram area into the protected area and the non-protected area by
using a special password.
Protected area : Inputting password is necessary to display
and edit a ladder program on CRT/MDI.
Non-protected area : To display and edit on CRT/MDI are
permitted without inputting password.
(b)Applied PMC models
This function can be used by following PMCs with step sequence function.
PMC-RB4(STEP)/RC4(STEP) /RB6(STEP)/RB6(STEP,IO-2)/NB2(STEP)
(c)Protected area / Non-protected area
The protected area and the non-protected area are decided according to
the subprogram number. Refer to the following for details.

Main-program LEVEL1 Protected

LEVEL2 Protected
LEVEL3 Protected
Subprogram P1P1499 Protected
P1500P2000 Non-Protected

(d)Setting of password
The password(R/W) which starts with "#" is to be set.
Example) #FANUC
For the operation to set the special password, refer to "(1) Password (b)Password
setting(compile)" because it is similar to a normal password.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 11/17
 (Replace the 4.5.5.3 Password)

4.5.5.3 Password
(1)Password
To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password.

Set password type Password type to be

entered
Both password(R) and password(R/W) Password (R/W)
Password(R/W) Password (R/W)
Password (R) Password (R)

After the discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen
appears.

Enter password(R)

Note) If an R/W password has been set up, Password(R/W) is displayed.

When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and
processing discontinues.(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)
When <Esc> is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

(2)Special password
There are two ways of decompilations of an object file with a special
password as follows.
(a)Decompilation of all programs (Necessary a special password input)
The procedure of a decompilation is similar to that of an object protected
by a 'non-special' password. Refer to "(1)password".
(b)Decompilation of non-protected subprograms area only
(Not necessary a special password input)
In OFF-LINE FUNCTION, it is possible to edit only non-protected subprograms
area,
(A printout is also possible. But it is impossible to convert to a mnemonic file
because a source program of a protected area is not created.)
Re-compilation after modifying of non-protected area is possible. But the
password set function is disabled. A special password in a decompiled object file
is automatically embedded and the protected area is re-protected.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 12/17
 The decompilation procedure is as follows.
i) Select [EXEC] for a decompilation. a password input screen is displayed.

Enter password (R/W)

ii)To decompile only subprograms of non-protected area, press <Enter>

key without entering a password.
To cancel a decompilation, press <Esc> key.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 13/17
 (Correct a part of the 4.5.7.1 Compile (4) Password in "4.5.7 Setting program options")

[present]
(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil
time.

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.)

[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the
password (R) setting dialog box.
[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box.
[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

[correcting]
(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil
time.

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.)

[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the
password (R) setting dialog box.
[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box.
[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Note) Password setting is disabled when only a non-protected subprograms area of

an object file with a special password has been decompiled. To enable a
password setting, please decompile all programs with a special password
input .
(Please refer to (2) Special password in 4.5.5.3 Password)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 14/17
 5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Replace APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLE

Use the cables below to transfer data from PC to a CNC, P-G(P-G Mark II or P-G Mate),
or ROM writer(FA writer or PMC writer).

1. For IBM PC/AT

(1)
A02B-0200-
8
CNC / P-G /
IBM PC/AT ROM writer

9-pin 25-pin male

female connector
t

CD(1)
RD(2) (2)SD
SD(3) (3)RD
ER(4) (6)DR
SG(5) (7)SG
DR(6) (8)CD
RS(7) (5)CS
CS(8) (4)RS
(20)ER

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 15/17
 (2)

IBM PC/AT CABLE A08B-0031-

CNC / P-G /
IBM PC/AT ROM writer

9-pin 25-pin 25-pin 25-pin

female female male male
connector connecto connecto connector
r r

CD(1) (8)CD SD(2) (2)SD

RD(2) (3)RD RD(3) (3)RD
SD(3) (2)SD RS(4) (4)RS

ER(4) (20)ER CS(5) (5)CS

SG(5) (7)SG ER(20) (20)ER

DR(6)
DR(6) (6)DR (6)DR
CD(8)
(4)RS (8)CD
RS(7)
SG(7)
(5)CS (7)SG
CS(8)
FG(1)
(22)CI (1)FG
CI(9)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 16/17
 For IBM PS/2

IBM PS/2 CABLE A08B-0031-

CNC / P-G /
IBM PS/2 ROM writer

25-pin 25-pin 25-pin 25-pin

female female male male
connecto connecto connecto connecto
r r r r

SD(2) (2)SD SD(2) (2)SD

RD(3) (3)RD RD(3) (3)RD
RS(4) (4)RS RS(4) (4)RS
CS(5) (5)CS CS(5) (5)CS
ER(20) (20)ER ER(20) (20)ER
DR(6)
DR(6) (6)DR (6)DR
CD(8)
CD(8) (8)CD (8)CD
SG(7)
SG(7) (7)SG (7)SG
FG(1)
FG(1) (1)FG (1)FG

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 17/17
 TECHNICAL REPORT NO. TMN 00/108E

Date 7 July, 2000

General Manager of
Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:

O Your information
O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E
FANUC Robotics
CINCINNATI MILACRON
O Machine tool builder
Sales agency
End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice
FAPT LADDER-II
4. Attached Document
Drawing B-66184EN/02-8 1/9 to 9/9
No.

5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List)

Type of data

No. FLB7-00/7023

Original section of issue

FLB7 FLB74 Person in
IDE
Manager Chief Charge
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name/Outline Correct,
Date
Delete

Basic Jun. 2000

Improvement of program option setting. Add
Function or later

Optional
Function

Unit

Maintenance
Parts
Notice
Correction
Another

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS

01 00.06.26 Newly Registration. MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 1/9
 FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline ____________________________________________________________________3
2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________3
3. Setting Program Options ___________________________________________________4
3.1 Menu Display __________________________________________________________ 4
3.2 Compile _______________________________________________________________ 4
3.3 Mnemonic Editing______________________________________________________ 6
3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values(OPTION.CNF) __________________ 6
4. Symbol & Comment Editing _______________________________________________8
5. Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program ________________________9

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 2/9
 1. Outline
The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added.
Improvement of program option setting.

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.

Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following
manual.

Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items

FAPT LADDER-II B-66184EN Operation for
OPERATOR'S MANUAL FAPT LADDER-II

2. Applied Software
The additional functions described here in apply to the following software.

Name Specification Version

FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 04.4 or later

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 3/9
 3. Setting Program Options
3.1 Menu Display

(Changing of Figure 4.5.7 in [ 4.5.7 Setting Program Options ])

Program option set-up

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Compile
Decompile
Mnemonic edit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3.2 Compile

(Add to since item (4) paragraph of [4.5.7.1 Compile])

(5) sym. ( too long strings )

When you compile the source program which contains the symbol which exceeds six characters.
How to treat the input signal and the internal relay address is specified.

[ ERROR ] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is considered to be an error,
and the compiler is not compiled. (Specification in the past)

[ IGNORE] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is replaced with six characters'
worth of a space code and compiled.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 4/9
 (6) Coil comment language
When you compile the source program. The form by which the coil comment is output to the
object file is specified.

[ English ] The Japanese coil comment is replaced with space and the compiler is output to the object
file.
[ Japanese] The Japanese coil comment is converted into the code data and the compiler is output to
the object file.

(Changing of Figure 4.5.7.1 in [ 4.5.7.1 Compile])

Program option set-up

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[ Compile ]
condense :[OFF/ON]
symbol/comment :[NOT USE /USE]
sym.( too long strings ) :[ERROR/IGNORE]
net comment :[NO/POINTERS]
password :[NO/RW&R/RW/R]
multiple used check :[NO/YES]
Coil comment language :[English/Japanese]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Note 1) A past "Symbol" item changed the name to "Symbol & coil comment".

Note 2) When the parameter of "Symbol/Comment" is assumed "ON", setting the parameter of "sym. (
too long strings )" becomes possible.

Note3) Japanese is not displayed on the NC side as for setting the coil comments language, and set
"English" mode, please.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 5/9
 3.3 Mnemonic Editing

(Changing of Item 4.5.7.3 in [ 4.5.7.3 Mnemonic Editing])

The thing to choose Mnemonic edit from the menu screen displays the option of a mnemonic edit.

(1) Warning detail out

The method of outputting the warning when convert from a mnemonic file to the source file is
specified. (Warning number K:W-4131, K:W-4133, and K:W-4139)

[NO] Conversion from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source ends. The generated
warning and the frequency are output.
[YES] The warning is output in the location where the warning is generated while converting from the
mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source. (Specification in the past)

Program option set-up

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[Mnemonic edit]

Warning detail out :[ NO/YES ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Fig. 4.5.7.3

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6/9
 3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)

(The item number of "4.5.7.3 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)"
is changed to "4.5.7.4")

(The item number of "Table 4.5.7.3" is changed to "4.5.7.4", and the following option
items are added)

Subsection Option Setting and function

*COMPAILE Comment_lang 0: The em-size character of the coil comment is replaced with space so
far and output to the object file.
1: The em-size character of the coil comment is output to the object file
by the code.
Symbol_over 0: The address, which includes the symbol that exceeds six
characters, is not compiled.
1: Address is compiled after the symbol, which exceeds six
characters, is converted into the space code.

*MNEMONIC Warning_full 0: When conversion into the source ends, the warning is output.
1: Warning is outputs at each warning generation.

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 7/9
 4.Symbol & Comment Editing

Clause (11) of "4.5.2.3 Symbol & Comment editing " is added.

(11) Editing screen (Additional content)

When the "sym.( too long strings )" option is set to "IGNORE". The display value of the
registration
number of symbols and the capacity of the coil comment of edit (symbol & comment) screen
changes.

Example: The symbol of NO.6 from NO.3 by seven characters or more. When assuming that the coil
comment is all 30 characters.

Registration number of symbols Capacity of the coil comment

Edit (symbol & comment) SB6 <O> C:\FLADDER\

SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180
NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

000001 * X00000.0 A1234 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA

000002 * X00000.1 A12345 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA
000003 X00000.2 A123456 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA
000004 Y00000.3 A1234567 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA
000005 Y00000.4 A12345678 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA
000006 Y00000.5 A123456789 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA

(1) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "ERROR".
Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006
COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180

(2) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "IGNORE".
Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006
COIL_COMMENT 00000180 00000180

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 8/9
 5. Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File

"4.5.8.2 Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File " Notes are added to the
clause.

Notes: When the coil comment which includes the alphabetic small letter of normal-width made in the
form of format A or B converts a mnemonic file into the source program, an alphabetic small
letter is replaced with the capital letter.

6. Warning

Addition to the item of 5.9.3 Warning of "5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST".

Number Message Contents

I:W-4503 $ : The character * in the comment
may not be displayed on the CNC.
I:W-4504 $ : Double-sized space character in
comment was changed to two single-
sized spaces.
I:W-4505 Too long strings for symbol data.
Because the character of no character code in
CNC is used to comment, the character might
not be able to be displayed.
Because the em-size space code was used to
comment, the em-size space code is replaced
with the normal-width space code (two
characters).
Because the symbol data exceeded the
limitation of the number of characters, the
symbol is deleted.
(Comment is effective)

TITLE
FAPT LADDER-II
SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS
MANUAL
DRAW.NO. CUST.
B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET
EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 9/9